MODEL
AR-M257
AR-M317
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
KEY OPERATOR'S GUIDE
Page
• PURPOSE OF THE KEY
OPERATOR PROGRAMS
1
1
2
• PROGRAMMING A KEY
OPERATOR CODE
•
USING THE KEY
OPERATOR PROGRAMS
• KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAM LIST
4
8
• GENERAL PROGRAMS
• PROGRAMS FOR
COPY MODE
15
16
20
• PROGRAMS FOR
PRINT MODE
•
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK
SCANNER MODE
PURPOSE OF THE KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS
The key operator programs are used by the key operator (administrator of the machine) to customize certain
features of the machine to better meet the needs of users.
This guide explains key operator programs that are common to all functions of the multifunction system (copy
function, fax function, printer function, and network scanner function), as well as programs that are specific to the
copy function, printer function, and network scanner function. Programs that are specific to the fax function are
explained in the following manual:
• Fax function ............."AR-FX7 Operation manual" (Chapter 8)
In order to access the key operator programs, the key operator code must be entered.
The key operator code is a 5-digit number that must be entered in order to access the key operator programs. The
key operator (administrator of the machine) should change the default key operator code that was set at the factory
to a new 5-digit number. Be sure to remember the new key operator code, as it must be entered each time the key
operator programs are subsequently used. (Only one key operator code can be programmed.)
To change the key operator code, see "USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS" on the following page.
The key operator code is initially set to "00000" at the factory.
1
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
When using the key operator programs for the first time, change the factory default key operator code to a new
code. (Step 3 to step 5)
Note
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Use the numeric keys to enter the new
5-digit key operator code.
1
5
Use a number for the key
operator code that has not
been programmed as an
account number for
auditing mode (a number
that has been
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
-----
00000
programmed as an
account number cannot
be used). The entered number will be the new key
operator code. Be sure to remember this number.
Touch the [KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS] key.
2
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
Touch the [OK] key. You will return to
the screen of step 4.
6
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
LIST PRINT
TOTAL COUNT
CLOCK
This completes the
procedure for changing
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
RECEIVE MODE
TRAY SETTINGS
KEYBOARD
SELECT
the key operator code. If
you wish to configure
another program, touch
the key of the desired
program in the screen of
step 4.
OK
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Use the numeric keys to enter the
five-digit key operater code.
3
4
Each time a digit is
entered, the dash (-) that
indicates the digit will
change to an asterisk ( ).
The factory default setting
for the key operator code
is 00000.
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to
exit the program.
7
KEY OPERATOR CODE
Touch a key to select the desired
category of key operator programs.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
EXIT
ACCOUNT
CONTROL
OPERATION
SETTINGS
ENERGY SAVE
DEVICE CONTROL
SCANNER
SETTINGS
COPY SETTINGS
LIST PRINT
PRINT SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR
CODE CHANGE
PRODUCT KEY
Example:
To change the key operator code, touch the [KEY
OPERATOR CODE CHANGE] key.
• Each time you need to configure a program, use this
procedure to select the program.
• In the following steps, the setting screen for the
selected program appears. Refer to the explanation
of the program to select the desired setting (the
explanations of the programs begin on page 8).
2
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
KEYS USED IN KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Example: Auditing mode
The following keys appear in screens that
require the entry of numerical values.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
(1 999)
20
OK
ACCOUNT CONTROL
1/3
AUDITING MODE
1
2
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
3
RESETTING ACCOUNT
4
5
1
When a checkbox ( ) appears in front of a setting, a checkmark ( ) will appear when the checkbox is touched.
This indicates that the setting is enabled. If a checkbox with a checkmark ( ) is touched, the checkmark is
cleared ( ) and the setting is disabled.
2
3
When a key that appears in the form
If the settings continue on the following screen(s), touch the
is touched, the setting screen of that key will appear.
X X X
and
keys to move back and forth through the
screens. To return to the category selection screen, touch the [OK] key.
The currently set numerical value is displayed.
4
5
Numerical values can be set by touching the
and
keys.
3
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
Note
GENERAL PROGRAMS
Factory default
Program name
Page
Program name
Page
DEVICE CONTROL
ACCOUNT CONTROL
DISABLING OF
DOCUMENT FEEDER
12
AUDITING MODE
—
8
8
TOTAL PAGES PER
ACCOUNT
DISABLING OF DUPLEX
DISABLING OF STAPLER
Disabled
Disabled
12
12
13
13
*2
RESETTING ACCOUNT
—
8
9
ACCOUNT NUMBER
CONTROL
SETTING
9
MEMORY FOR PRINTER
13
ACCOUNT NUMBER
SECURITY
Disabled
FOR PRINT
CANCEL JOBS OF
INVALID ACCOUNTS
9
HOLD : 30%
*4
13
13
13
ENERGY SAVE
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF
Enabled
60 (min.)
10
10
MODE TIMING
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF
TIMER
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL
FEEDING MODE
PREHEAT MODE SETTING
TONER SAVE MODE
15 (min.)
Disabled
10
10
SECURITY SETTINGS
—
13
14
KEY OPERATOR CODE CHANGE
00000
OPERATION SETTINGS
AUTO CLEAR SETTING
*4
PRODUCT KEY
11
11
11
*4
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
—
—
14
14
NETWORK SCANNER
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
• KEYS TOUCH
SOUND: Short
*5
EXPANSION KIT
• KEYS TOUCH
INITIAL POINT:
14
14
SETTING
0.0 (sec)
• DISABLE AUTO
Disabled
11
11
Factory default
settings
Program name
Page
COPY SETTINGS
PRINT JOB
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
—
15
15
15
12
12
• Document
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SETTING
AMERICAN
ENGLISH
feeder: 3
DISABLE DISPLAY
TIMEOUT
Disabled
12
12
12
AUTO PAPER SELECTION
SETTING
15
15
DISABLING OF TRAY
SETTINGS
Disabled
Disabled
SETTING A MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF COPIES
999
DISABLING OF CLOCK
ADJUSTMENT
SORT AUTO SELECT
Enabled
Disabled
15
15
DISABLING DELETION OF
JOB PROGRAMS
CARD SHOT SETTINGS
—
15
4
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK SCANNER MODE
Factory default
Factory default
Program name
Page
Program name
Page
*1
PRINT SETTINGS
SCANNER SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
SETTING
• Compression
mode: G4
per file: All
20
PRINTING
Disabled
16
3
16
16
SETTING
type: Text/Photo
20
*4
PRINTING
• Exposure: Auto
16
16
SETTING
300 dpi
20
20
20
PRINT
SETTINGS
CONDITION
SETTINGS
FROM ATS
Enabled
16
16
ADDRESS / SENDER KEYS
DISPLAYED SETTING
8 (keys)
SETTING CHANGES
INTERFACE SETTINGS
HEXADECIMAL DUMP
MODE
Disabled
180 (sec)
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
*4
I/O TIMEOUT
PARALLEL PORT
AUTO
USB PORT EMULATION
PCL
*4
SWITCHING
NETWORK PORT
PORT SWITCHING
END OF JOB
*4
METHOD
ENABLE PARALLEL
Enabled
*4
PORT
ENABLE USB PORT
Enabled
Enabled
18
18
ENABLE NETWORK
*4
PORT
*4
ENABLE ECP
Disabled
18
NETWORK SETTINGS
ENABLE TCP/IP
18
18
19
19
19
ENABLE NetWare
ENABLE NetBEUI
RESET THE NIC
Enabled
Enabled
*4
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS
RESTORE FACTORY
DEFAULTS
—
—
—
19
19
19
*1 Appears when the scanner function is enabled.
*2 Appears when a FINISHER is installed.
*3 Can be enabled when the printer or fax function is
enabled and a JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT or
FINISHER is installed.
STORE CURRENT
CONFIGURATION
RESTORE
CONFIGURATION
*4 Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is
installed.
*5 Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT and
EXPANSION MEMORY are installed.
5
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
The key operator programs are arranged in the following menu.
* Some programs contain an additional level of settings (setting screen).
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
ACCOUNT CONTROL
AUDITING MODE
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
RESETTING ACCOUNT
ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING
CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS
ENERGY SAVE
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER
PREHEAT MODE SETTING
TONER SAVE MODE
OPERATION SETTINGS
AUTO CLEAR SETTING
MESSAGE TIME SETTING
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING
DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB
STREAM FEEDING MODE
DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING
DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT
DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS
DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
DEVICE CONTROL
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER
DISABLING OF DUPLEX
OFFSET FUNCTION SETTING
MEMORY FOR PRINTER
DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY COUNTING
RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE
KEY OPERATOR CODE CHANGE
PRODUCT KEY
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS
SERIAL NUMBER
COPY SETTINGS
ROTATION COPY SETTING
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING
SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF COPIES
SORT AUTO SELECT
DISABLING DELETION OF JOB PROGRAMS
CARD SHOT SETTINGS
6
Level 3
Level 1
Level 2
PRINT SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL
FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT
CHANGES
INTERFACE SETTINGS
I/O TIMEOUT
SWITCHING
USB PORT EMULATION
SWITCHING
SWITCHING
PORT SWITCHING METHOD
ENABLE PARALLEL PORT
ENABLE USB PORT
ENABLE NETWORK PORT
ENABLE ECP
NETWORK SETTINGS
IP ADDRESS SETTING
ENABLE TCP/IP
ENABLE NetWare
ENABLE EtherTalk
RESET THE NIC
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
STORE CURRENT
RESTORE CONFIGURATION
SCANNER SETTINGS
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS /
SENDER KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING
7
GENERAL PROGRAMS
This chapter explains key operator programs that are common to all functions of the multifunction system (copy
function, fax function, printer function, and network scanner function).
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
ACCOUNT CONTROL
This program is used to display the page counts of
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
each account. Misfed pages are not included in the
ACCOUNT CONTROL
OK
page counts. When the fax and network scanner
functions are used, the fax and network scanner page
counts show the number of pages transmitted.
1/3
AUDITING MODE
Touch the [TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT] key to
display the page count screen.
RESETTING ACCOUNT
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
OK
"ACCOUNT CONTROL" consists of the following
programs.
ACCOUNT
NUMBER
COPIES
(LIMIT)
PRINTS
SCAN
FAX SEND
● AUDITING MODE
● TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
● RESETTING ACCOUNT
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
11111
22222
33333
1/2
(150,000)
123,456
44444
● ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL
● ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING
● ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY
● CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS *
* Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is
installed.
(150,000)
RESETTING ACCOUNT
This program is used to reset the page counts of each
account to zero.
When the fax and network scanner functions are used,
this program resets the fax and network scanner page
counts to zero.
AUDITING MODE
the pages printed by each account (up to 100 accounts
can be established). The page counts can be viewed
in the display. This program is initially disabled (factory
default setting).
Touch the [RESETTING ACCOUNT] key to display the
account reset screen.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
RESETTING ACCOUNT
OK
COPIES
(LIMIT)
ACCOUNT
NUMBER
PRINTS
SCAN
FAX SEND
After enabling "AUDITING MODE", program
account numbers using "ACCOUNT
NUMBER CONTROL".
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
(150,000)
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
123,456
11111
22222
33333
44444
1/2
Note
ALL ACCOUNTS
RESET
When using the copy function, fax function, or network
scanner function, an account number must be entered
to scan an original.
● Resetting a single account
Touch the key of the account that you wish to reset,
and then select [YES] in the confirmation screen. If
the account that you wish to reset does not appear,
touch the
key or
key until the account
appears. When finished, touch the [OK] key.
● Resetting all accounts
Touch the [RESET] key and then select [YES].
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
8
GENERAL PROGRAMS
ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL
This program is used to store, delete, and change
account numbers for AUDITING MODE. A maximum
of 100 account numbers can be stored.
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING
A limit for the number of copies that can be made can
be set for a single account or for all accounts at once.
The maximum limit that can be entered is 999,999.
Touch the [ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING] key to display
the account limit setting screen.
● Storing a new account number
To store a new account number, touch the [ENTER]
key and then use the numeric keys to enter a 5-digit
account number. Touch the [ENTER] key to store
the number. After storing the account number, you
can continue storing other account numbers.
Note that the same number as the key operator
code cannot be stored.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING
OK
INPUT ACCOUNT NUMBER TO BE LIMITED.
ACCOUNT
NUMBER
NUMBER OF
COPIES MADE
MAXIMUM
---,---
-----
123,456
LIMIT
ENTER
● Deleting an account number
● Setting a limit for a single account
To delete an account number, touch the [DELETE]
key and then select whether you wish to delete a
single account number or all account numbers.
To delete a single account number, use the numeric
keys to enter the account number that you wish to
delete and then touch the [ENTER] key.
To delete all account numbers, touch the [DELETE]
key and then touch [YES] in the screen that appears
to confirm the deletion.
Use the numeric keys to enter the number of the
account for which you wish to set a limit, and then
enter the limit. When finished, touch the [ENTER]
key.
If you enter an account number that already has a
limit, the limit will appear in the display. To change
the limit, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) (the display
will change to hyphens (-)) and then enter the new
limit.
If you touch the [ENTER] key while the display
shows hyphens (-) for the limit, the limit set for the
account will be canceled. When you have finished
setting a limit for one account, you can continue
setting limits for other accounts.
● Changing an account number
To change an account number, touch the
[CHANGE] key and use the numeric keys to enter
the account number that you wish to change. Enter
the new account number and then touch the
[ENTER] key. After changing the account number,
you can continue changing other account numbers.
If you make a mistake while entering the account
number that you wish to change and enter a number
that is not in use, an alarm will sound and the display
will change to hyphens (-).
When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.
● Setting a limit for all accounts
Touch the [LIMIT] key. [ALL] will appear in the
account number entry screen.
Enter a limit for all acounts in the same way as
When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.
ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY
This program is used to display an alarm and prohibit
entry of account numbers for one minute if an incorrect
acount number is entered three times in a row when
"AUDITING MODE" is enabled. (This prevents
unauthorized people from attempting to guess an
account number.)
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS
This program is used to control use of the printer
function when "AUDITING MODE" is enabled. When
this program is enabled, the machine will not print a
print job if the operator enters an invalid account
number at the computer or fails to enter an account
number.
When the program is disabled, print jobs received
without the entry of a valid account number will be
printed and the number of pages will be included in the
[OTHERS] count.
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
9
GENERAL PROGRAMS
PREHEAT MODE SETTING
ENERGY SAVE
If the printer is not used for the length of time set with
this program after printing is finished, it will enter
preheat mode. This function reduces your power
costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural
resources and reduce pollution.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ENERGY SAVE
OK
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF
PREHEAT MODE SETTING
Select the most suitable setting to match your pattern
of use of the printer.
15min
The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in
increments of one minute. (Preheat mode cannot be
disabled.)
"ENERGY SAVE" provides the following four programs
to reduce your power costs. From an environmental
perspective, this also helps conserve natural
resources and reduce pollution.
● AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER
● PREHEAT MODE SETTING
The factory default setting is "15" (min.).
TONER SAVE MODE
The toner save mode will reduce toner consumption by
approximately 10% in the automatic, text, and
text/photo exposure modes. Copies will be lighter but
still adequate for general use. Selection of this mode
has no effect on the photo and super photo modes.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
● TONER SAVE MODE
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF
If the machine is not used for the amount of time set in
"AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER", AUTO POWER
SHUT-OFF will activate and switch the machine to a
standby state that conserves the maximum amount of
energy. This program can be used to prevent AUTO
POWER SHUT-OFF from operating. When this is
done, the "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER" setting
is disabled. Use this program when circumstances
require that AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF be disabled.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
Rather than disabling the auto power
shut-off feature, we suggest that you
Caution
first try lengthening the time set in
"AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER" In
most cases a suitable timer setting
will allow work to proceed with
minimal delay and still enable you to
enjoy the benefits of power
conservation.
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER
This program is used to set the amount of time after
which "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF" activates when the
machine is not used.
This function allows you to reduce power costs, and at
the same time helps conserve natural resources and
reduce pollution.
The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in
increments of one minute.
The factory default setting is "60" (min.).
• Select a suitable time according to your
pattern of use of the machine.
Note
• If "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF" is disabled,
the time setting is also disabled.
10
GENERAL PROGRAMS
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
This program is used to select whether or not a beep is
sounded when a key is touched, and if sounded, what
type of beep.
OPERATION SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
OPERATION SETTINGS
OK
The program is also use to select whether or not a
special key touch beep is sounded at the initial point of
a setting.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• KEYS TOUCH SOUND: Short
1/3
60sec
AUTO CLEAR SETTING
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
• KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT: Disabled
operation of the machine and consist of the following
programs:
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
OK
KEYS TOUCH SOUND
● KEYS TOUCH SOUND
● TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING
● DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB
● STREAM FEEDING MODE
● DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING
● DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT
● DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS
● DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT
key.... Touch this key to select a short beep
volume. A single short beep indicates a
valid key, and a double short beep indicates
an invalid key.
key.... Touch this key to select a long beep
volume. A single long beep indicates a valid
key, and a double long beep indicates an
invalid key.
AUTO CLEAR SETTING
If no action is taken for a certain length of time when
viewing information on finished jobs, jobs in progress,
or stored jobs, the auto clear function activates and
returns the display to the initial screen of copy mode or
the job status screen. AUTO CLEAR SETTING is used
to set the amount of time that must elapse for the auto
clear function to activate. The time can be set from 10
seconds to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds,
or the auto clear function can be disabled. (This setting
only operates in copy mode and network scanner
mode.)
key .... Touch this key to disable key touch beeps.
Select the [KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT]
checkbox to have three long beeps sound (when the
beep volume is set to long) or three short beeps sound
(when the beep volume is set to short) when the initial
point of a setting is reached while selecting basic settings.
The initial point settings are as follows:
Mode
Initial point (set from initial screen)
The factory default setting is "60" (sec.).
Copy mode
Ratio: 100%
Exposure: 3
MESSAGE TIME SETTING
Fax mode
Exposure: 3
This program is used to set the length of time that
messages appear in the display (this applies to
messages that appear for a certain length of time and
then automatically disappear.)
Network scanner Exposure setting: 3
mode
TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING
These programs are used to set the length of time that
must elapse until a setting is entered after a key is
touched, and to disable key repeat.
The time can be set to as long as 12 seconds in
increments of one second.
The factory default setting is "6" (sec.).
The setting entry time can be set from 0.0 seconds to
2.0 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds.
When [DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT] is enabled, only
one touch is registered if key is touched continuously.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• Time to entry: 0.0 (sec.)
• DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT: Disabled
DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB
(When the printer function is enabled)
Enable this program if you wish to prevent pausing of
printing for interrupt copy jobs.
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
11
GENERAL PROGRAMS
STREAM FEEDING MODE
DEVICE CONTROL
Use this program to enable stream feeding mode.
When this mode is enabled and originals are scanned
from the REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER, an
original can be added to the REVERSING SINGLE
PASS FEEDER within 5 seconds after the previous
original is fed, and be automatically scanned using the
settings of the previous original. This function can be
used with the copy function and the scanner function.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
DEVICE CONTROL
OK
1/3
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT
FEEDER
DISABLING OF DUPLEX
DISABLING OF STAPLER
your conditions of use.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING
This program is used to change the language used in
the display.
"DEVICE CONTROL" consists of the following
programs:
The factory default setting is "AMERICAN ENGLISH".
● DISABLING OF STAPLER
● OUTPUT TRAYS
● OFFSET FUNCTION SETTING
● MEMORY FOR PRINTER
● DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY COUNTING
● RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING
● MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE
● SECURITY SETTINGS
DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT
When this program is disabled, the display will close
the screen that is currently open and return to the
initial screen if no keys are touched for 60 seconds.
When the program is enabled, the display will not
close the screen that is currently open.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS
This program can be enabled to prohibit changes to
the paper tray settings in the user settings.
Note that bypass tray settings will still be possible.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER
Use this program when the RSPF is not operational or
you wish to disable the automatic feeding function.
(Originals can still be scanned using the document
glass.)
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
This program can be enabled to prohibit adjustment of
the "CLOCK" setting in the custom settings.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
DISABLING OF DUPLEX
Use this program when you wish to disable the
two-sided printing function or the function has failed.
When this program is enabled, only one-sided printing
is possible.This program is initially disabled (factory
default setting).
DISABLING OF STAPLER
(When a FINISHER is installed)
Use this program to disable stapling.
When this program is enabled, stapling does not take
place.This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
12
GENERAL PROGRAMS
OUTPUT TRAYS
RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING
(When the printer or fax function is enabled and a JOB
SEPARATOR TRAY KIT or FINISHER is installed)
(When the printer function or fax function is enabled)
This program is used to set the amount of time that
must elapse after a copy job is finished before the
printer or fax function resumes operation. The amount
of time can be set from 1 second to 60 seconds in
increments of 1 second.
This program is used to select the respective output
trays for the copy, printer, and fax functions.
The factory default setting is "PATTERN 1".
Example: When a FINISHER is installed
* Settings that can be selected vary depending on the
options that are installed.
The factory default setting is "60" (sec.).
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE
When this program is enabled, originals of mixed
length (the widths must be the same) can be scanned
in copy mode and each original copied onto the
corresponding length of paper.
Settings
PATTERN 1
Description
Copy: Offset tray
Printer: Center tray
Fax: Top tray
PATTERN 2
Copy: Center tray
Printer: Offset tray
Fax: Top tray
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
PATTERN 3
(When the fax
function is enabled)
Copy: Center tray
Printer: Offset tray
Fax: Center tray
SECURITY SETTINGS
The following settings are related to security. Touch
the [SECURITY SETTINGS] key to configure the
settings.
PATTERN 4
(When the fax
function is enabled)
Copy: Offset tray
Printer: Center tray
Fax: Center tray
● SSL SETTINGS
SSL can be used for data transmission over a
network.
OFFSET FUNCTION SETTING
This program is used to enable or disable the offset
functions of the center tray and offset tray (when a
FINISHER is installed).
SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of
information communicated over a network.
Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and
receive sensitive information safely.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
•
HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP
communication.
•
PP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication.
MEMORY FOR PRINTER
This program is used to set the amount of IMC
memory that is allocated to the printer function. The
amount of memory can be set from 30% to 70% in
increments of 10%.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• 50 (%)
• THE MEMORY AREA FOR PRINT HOLD: 30 (%)
● Memory allocated to print hold
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
To set the amount of memory allocated to print hold,
touch the [THE MEMORY AREA FOR PRINT
HOLD] key. The amount of memory can be set from
30% to 70% in increments of 10%. If 0% is selected,
the print hold function cannot be used.
DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY
COUNTING
This program is used to disable counting of pages
delivered to the center tray.
When this program is enabled, center tray full
detection does not take place.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
13
GENERAL PROGRAMS
KEY OPERATOR CODE
CHANGE
PRODUCT KEY
(When the PRINTER
EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to change the key operator code
that must be entered to configure the key operator
programs. When the machine is first used, the key
operator (adminstrator of the machine) should change
the key operator code that was set at the factory to the
desired 5-digit code. (A number that has been
programmed as an account number cannot be used.)
Only one key operator code can be programmed.
The factory default setting for the key operator code is
00000.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
PRODUCT KEY
OK
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT
SERIAL NUMBER
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS
Use these programs to enter the product keys for the
following options.
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is
installed)
This program is used to enter the product key that
enables the machine to be used as a PostScript
printer. Ask your dealer for the product key.
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT and
EXPANSION MEMORY are installed)
This program is used to enter the product key for the
network scanner function. Ask your dealer for the
product key.
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is
installed)
This program is used to enter the product key for
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS, which enables
customer product support via a network system. Ask
your dealer for the product key.
SERIAL NUMBER
Use this program to display the serial number of the
machine. The serial number is required when
obtaining product keys for PS3 EXPANSION KIT,
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT and the
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS.
14
PROGRAMS FOR COPY MODE
This chapter explains the key operator programs that are used for copy mode.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
COPY SETTINGS
This program is used to adjust the exposure level
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
when "Auto" is used for the copy exposure.
COPY FUNCTION SETTINGS
OK
The auto exposure level can be set separately for the
document glass and RSPF.
1/3
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS
[1] is the lightest level and [5] is the darkest level.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• Document glass: 3
ROTATION COPY SETTING
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
• Document feeder: 3
"COPY SETTINGS" consists of the following
programs:
● INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS
● ROTATION COPY SETTING
● EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
● AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING
● SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF COPIES
● SORT AUTO SELECT
● DISABLING DELETION OF JOB PROGRAMS
● CARD SHOT SETTINGS
AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING
This program is used to select the paper type* that is
used when the automatic paper selection function
operates. "PLAIN PAPER" or "PLAIN AND RECYCLE
PAPER" can be selected. Auto paper selection can
also be disabled with this program.
The factory default setting is "PLAIN PAPER".
* The paper type set for each tray in the tray settings of
the user settings. (See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the
operation manual for copier.)
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS
The copy settings revert to the default settings when
the power switch is turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL]
key ( ) is pressed, or when the auto clear time
elapses. This program is used to change the default
settings, or return changed default settings to the initial
factory default settings.
SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
COPIES
This program is used to set the maximum number of
copies that are allowed per original.
Any number from 1 to 999 can be set for the
maximum.
Defaults for the following copy settings can be
changed:
The factory default setting is "999".
• Paper tray
• Copy ratio
• Exposure mode
• Duplex function
SORT AUTO SELECT
This program can be used to disable automatic
selection of the sort function.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
• Post-processing functions* (non-sort, sort, staple
sort, and group)
*Settings for the post-processing functions vary
depending on whether or not a FINISHER is
installed.
DISABLING DELETION OF JOB
PROGRAMS
This program is used to prevent copy settings stored in
job programs from being changed or deleted.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
If this program is used to change the default
setting for the duplex function to other than
Note
"one-sided" "one-sided" and the RSPF
fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to
"one-sided" "one-sided".
* DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER (p.12)
DISABLING OF DUPLEX (p.12)
CARD SHOT SETTINGS
ROTATION COPY SETTING
This program is used to set the initial original card size
for the card shot function. Entry of the X dimension
(width) is initially selected. Touch the keys to enter the
Y dimension (length) in the same way. To have "FIT
TO PAGE" be initially selected when the card shot
screen is opened, touch the [FIT TO PAGE] key.
When this program is enabled, the original image is
automatically rotated 90 degrees in the event that the
original and the paper are in different orientations.
(Rotation can only take place when auto paper
selection and automatic ratio selection are used.)
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
15
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE
This chapter explains key operator programs that are used for the printer function. These programs can only be
configured on models that have the printer function.
FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT
PRINT SETTINGS
This program is used to enable or disable automatic
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
printing on a different size of paper when no paper
PRINT SETTINGS
OK
trays have the selected size of paper.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
DEFAULT SETTINGS
NETWORK SETTINGS
INTERFACE SETTINGS
SETTINGS
EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY FROM ATS
This program is used to exclude paper in the bypass
tray when automatic paper selection is used.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
These programs allow you to change certain default
settings for the printer function.
The "DEFAULT SETTINGS" consist of the following
programs:
● PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING
● PRINT DENSITY LEVEL
CHANGES
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to prevent the configuration
setting defaults from being changed.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
● PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING
● ROTATED PRINT
● FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT
● EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY FROM ATS
● DISABLE DEFAULT SETTING CHANGES
PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING
This program is used to prohibit the printing of notice
pages. For an explanation of notice pages, see "If a
Notice Page is printed" in the online manual for printer.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL
The print density can be set to one of five different
levels. [1] is the lightest level and [5] is the darkest
level.
The factory default setting is "3".
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to prohibit the printing of test
pages.
When the program is enabled, a test page cannot be
printed from the user settings. (See the operation
manual for copier)
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
ROTATED PRINT
This program is used to enable or disable rotation of
the print image when an A4R, B5R, or 8-1/2 x 11R
(Letter R) document is being printed but there is no
paper loaded in that orientation.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
16
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE
The "INTERFACE SETTINGS" are used to monitor
● I/O TIMEOUT
● PARALLEL PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
● USB PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
● NETWORK PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
● PORT SWITCHING METHOD
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to set the printer language when
the machine is connected using the parallel port.
The factory default setting is "AUTO".
Unless printing errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that the setting be kept at "AUTO".
Selections
AUTO
Description
The printer language is
automatically changed to match
the data received from the
computer.
● ENABLE PARALLEL PORT
● ENABLE USB PORT
● ENABLE NETWORK PORT
● ENABLE ECP
PostScript
The data received from the
(When the PS3 computer is printed using
HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE
EXPANSION
PostScript.
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
KIT is installed)
This program is used to print out the print data from the
computer in hexadecimal and in the corresponding text
characters (based on ASCII code). This allows you to
check whether or not print data is being correctly sent
from the computer.
PCL
The data received from the
computer is printed using PCL.
USB PORT EMULATION SWITCHING
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
This program is used to set the printer language when
the machine is connected using the USB port. The
selections are the same as for "PARALLEL PORT
EMULATION SWITCHING".
Example of output in hexadecimal dump mode (A4
portrait)
The factory default setting is "PCL*".
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed, the setting is
"AUTO".
Unless printing errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that the setting be kept at "AUTO".
I/O TIMEOUT
NETWORK PORT EMULATION
SWITCHING
This program is used to set the amount of time until I/O
timeout when waiting for print data.
In the event that the set amount of time elapses
without the port receiving any print data, the I/O
timeout function temporarily breaks the port
connection and intiates automatic port selection or
makes the port begin waiting for the next set of print
data.
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to set the printer language when
the machine is connected using the USB port. The
selections are the same as for "PARALLEL PORT
EMULATION SWITCHING".
The factory default setting is "AUTO".
The factory default settings are as follows:
• 180 (sec.)
• When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed:
60 (sec.)
Unless printing errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that the setting be kept at "AUTO".
17
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE
PORT SWITCHING METHOD
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to set the method for switching
printer ports.
The machine can use the following three printer ports:
• Parallel port
machine is used as a network printer. The "NETWORK
SETTINGS" consist of the following programs:
● IP ADDRESS SETTING
• USB port
● ENABLE TCP/IP
• Network port
● ENABLE NetWare
The factory default setting is "SWITCH AT END OF
JOB".
● ENABLE EtherTalk
● ENABLE NetBEUI
● RESET THE NIC
Selections
Description
Consult your network administrator
before configuring the NETWORK
SETTINGS.
SWITCH AT
END OF JOB
Automatic printer port selection
at the end of each print job.
Caution
SWITCHAFTER Automatic printer port selection if
I/O TIMEOUT
the time set in "I/O TIMEOUT"
elapses.
• After changing the settings, you must turn
Note
off the machine’s power switch, wait
briefly, and then turn the switch back on in
order to make the changes take effect.
• Some programs in the following are
marked by "*1". This indicates that a
message will appear at the end of the
setting procedure asking you to confirm
execution of the new setting. If needed,
you can cancel the new setting by
touching the [NO] key.
ENABLE PARALLEL PORT
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to enable or disable printing via
the parallel port.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
ENABLE USB PORT
IP ADDRESS SETTING
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
This program is used to set the IP address (IP
address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway) of the machine
when TCP/IP protocol is used on the network.
When "DHCP" is selected, the machine will obtain an IP
address automatically. This is the factory default setting.
When the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be
sure to enable the "ENABLE TCP/IP" program.
This program is used to enable or disable printing via
the USB port.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
ENABLE NETWORK PORT
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
When DHCP is used, the IP address
assigned to the machine may
This program is used to enable or disable printing via
the network port.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
Caution
automatically be changed on
occasion. If this happens, printing
will not be possible.
ENABLE ECP
This setting is only effective in a network
Note
environment that uses Ipv4 TCP/IP protocol.
To set an IP address on a Ipv6 TCP/IP
network, use the Web pages. In an IPv6
environment, the machine can use LPD or
IPP protocol.
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
Enable this program when you wish to use ECP mode
on the parallel port.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
ENABLE TCP/IP
This program must be enabled to use the machine on
a TCP/IP network. "IP ADDRESS SETTING" must
also be configured.
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).
ENABLE NetWare
This program must be enabled to use the machine on
a network that uses NetWare protocol.
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).
18
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE
ENABLE EtherTalk
This program must be enabled to use the machine on
a network that uses EtherTalk protocol.
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)
These programs are used to return the configuration
and the "PRINT SETTINGS" (p.16) to the factory
default settings. The programs are also used to store
the current settings and to restore stored settings.
"INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS" consists of
the following programs:
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).
ENABLE NetBEUI
This program must be enabled to use the machine on
a network that uses NetBEUI protocol.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
● RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
● STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION
● RESTORE CONFIGURATION
*1
RESET THE NIC
This program is used to restore all network settings to
the factory default settings.
Some programs in the following are marked
Note
by "*1". This indicates that a message will
appear at the end of the setting procedure
asking you to confirm execution of the new
setting. If needed, you can cancel the new
setting by touching the [NO] key.
*1
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
This program is used to return the configuration
settings (see the online manual for network printer)
and the "PRINT SETTINGS" (p.16) to the factory
default settings. If you need a record of the current
settings before restoring the factory defaults, use
current settings. (See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the
operation manual for copier.)
*1
STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION
This program is used to store the current configuration
settings (see online manual for network printer) and
"PRINT SETTINGS" (p.16). The stored settings will not
the stored settings, use the "RESTORE
CONFIGURATION" program.
*1
RESTORE CONFIGURATION
This program is used to restore settings that were
stored using the "STORE CURRENT
CONFIGURATION" program.
The current settings will change to the restored
settings.
If any of the "NETWORK SETTINGS" (p.18)
Note
were changed before execution of this
program, you must turn off the machine’s
power switch, wait briefly, and then turn the
switch back on in order to make the settings
take effect.
19
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK
SCANNER MODE
This chapter explains key operator programs that are used for the network scanner function. These programs can
only be configured on models that have the network scanner function.
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS /
SENDER KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING
This program is used to select the number of
SCANNER SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
SCANNER SETTINGS
OK
one-touch keys that are displayed in the address book
screen and sender selection screen. Selections are
[6], [8], and [12].
1/2
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING
The factory default setting is "8" (keys).
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
Each displayed one-touch key name can be
Note
up to 18 characters long when the number
of displayed one-touch keys is 6 or 8. Each
name can only be 10 characters long when
the number of displayed one-touch keys is
12.
The "SCANNER SETTINGS" consist of the following
programs:
● INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING
● INITIAL QUALITY SETTING
● INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
● DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
● THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS / SENDER
KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING
Use this program to change the default file format (file
type, compression mode, and number of pages per
file) that is used when sending an image by Scan to
E-mail, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to FTP.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• File type: TIFF
• Compression mode: G4
• Number of pages per file: All
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING
This program is used to set the default original type
and exposure level for network scanner mode.
For informatin on these settings, see the operation
manual for network scanner.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• Original image type: Text/Photo
• Exposure: Auto
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
This program is used to set the default resolution for
network scanner mode.
The factory default setting is "300" (dpi).
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
Use this program to select the initial screen that
appears when the [SCAN] key is pressed to switch to
network scanner mode, or when the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
) is pressed in scanner mode.
Three selections are available for the initial screen:
• CONDITION SETTINGS
• ADDRESS BOOK (ABC)
• ADDRESS BOOK (GROUP)
The factory default setting is "CONDITION SETTINGS".
20
AR-M257/AR-M317
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135.
www.sharpusa.com
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink
to help protect the environment.
PRINTED IN CHINA
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper
2007B
KS1
TINSE1679QSZZ
MODEL
AR-M257
AR-M317
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
(for copier)
Page
• BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE
8
• COPY FUNCTIONS
21
• CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
35
53
• USER SETTINGS
• TROUBLESHOOTING
AND MAINTENANCE
59
• PERIPHERAL DEVICES
AND SUPPLIES
78
82
• APPENDIX
➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣
FOR YOUR RECORDS ...
To protect against loss or theft, record and retain for reference the
copier’s serial number located on the back of the unit.
Model Number
Serial Number
Date of Purchase
Place of Purchase
Authorized Sharp Copier
Service Department Number
➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢
For users in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to
this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain
compliance with EMC regulations.
Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law. The
following items are normally prohibited from copying by national law. Other
items may be prohibited by local law.
● Money
● Stamps
● Bonds
● Stocks
● Bank drafts
● Checks
● Passports ● Driver's licenses
CONTENTS
CAUTIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3
● CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................... 3
● IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN INSTALLATION SITE ........................................................... 3
● CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE.................................................................................................... 4
● ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................. 5
USING THE MANUAL ............................................................................................................................... 5
● ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS............................................................................................................. 5
● THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE INDICATIONS ....................................................... 6
● CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL....................................................................................................... 6
MAIN FEATURES...................................................................................................................................... 7
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
3
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS..................... 8
● OPERATION PANEL......................................10
● TOUCH PANEL ..............................................11
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS...................... 35
● SORT COPY.................................................. 35
● GROUP COPY............................................... 35
● OFFSET FUNCTION ..................................... 35
● STAPLE SORT (when the finisher
POWER ON AND OFF..................................... 13
● POWER ON....................................................13
● POWER OFF ..................................................13
● INITIAL SETTINGS.........................................14
● POWER SAVE MODES..................................14
(AR-FN5A) is installed) .................................. 37
● ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND
STAPLING POSITIONS................................. 37
SPECIAL MODES............................................ 39
● GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS.................................. 40
● MARGIN SHIFT COPY .................................. 41
● ERASE COPY................................................ 42
● DUAL PAGE COPY ....................................... 43
● PAMPHLET COPY ........................................ 44
● JOB BUILD MODE......................................... 45
● MULTI SHOT COPY...................................... 46
● ORIGINAL SIZE............................................. 47
● COVER COPY............................................... 48
● B/W REVERSE COPY................................... 50
● CARD SHOT.................................................. 51
LOADING PAPER............................................ 15
● PAPER............................................................15
● LOADING PAPER...........................................17
● CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND
PAPER SIZE SETTINGS................................19
2
COPY FUNCTIONS
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE ................... 21
NORMAL COPYING ........................................ 22
●
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS ....22
● COPYING FROM THE RSPF.........................23
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES ...24
●
● BYPASS FEED (special paper) ......................26
4
USER SETTINGS
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING............. 27
● USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS..................27
● USING THE RSPF..........................................28
CUSTOM SETTINGS....................................... 53
● GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CUSTOM
SETTINGS..................................................... 54
● SETTINGS..................................................... 55
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT............................ 29
●
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE......29
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY............................. 56
● STORING A JOB PROGRAM........................ 56
● EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM................... 57
● DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM...... 57
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM............ 30
● AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION .................30
● MANUAL RATIO SELECTION........................31
● SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND
AUDITING MODE ............................................ 58
● COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS
HORIZONTAL COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY
(XY ZOOM copying)........................................32
ENABLED ...................................................... 58
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN....................... 34
1
5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY MESSAGES..................................... 60
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 62
MISFEED REMOVAL....................................... 66
● MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE .................66
● MISFEED IN THE RSPF.................................67
● MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY .................68
● MISFEED IN THE MACHINE..........................68
● MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY.................70
● MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY......70
● MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY .....71
● MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA
(when a job separator tray kit or finisher
(AR-FN5A) is installed) ...................................72
● MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY
(when a finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed).........72
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ........ 74
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT......... 75
● STAPLE JAM REMOVAL ...............................76
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND
TOTAL COUNT................................................ 76
CLEANING THE MACHINE............................. 77
● DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF...................77
● THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER
FEED ROLLER...............................................77
6
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES.................................. 78
● FINISHER (AR-FN5A) ....................................79
● 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT..............80
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES............................... 81
● PROPER STORAGE ......................................81
7
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................... 82
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET................ 84
INDEX............................................................... 92
● INDEX BY PURPOSE.....................................95
2
CAUTIONS
Follow the cautions below when using this machine.
CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE
Warning:
• The fusing area is hot. Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper.
• Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
Caution:
• Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off. After turning the machine off, wait 10 to 15 seconds before turning it
back on.
• Machine power must be turned off before installing any supplies.
• Place the machine on a firm, level surface.
• Do not install the machine in a humid or dusty location.
• When the machine is not used for a long time, for example, during prolonged holidays, turn the power switch off
and remove the power cord from the outlet.
• When moving the machine, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet.
• Do not cover the machine with a dust cover, cloth or plastic film while the power is on. Doing so may prevent heat
dissipation, damaging the machine.
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous laser radiation exposure.
• The socket-outlet should be installed near the machine and should be easily accessible.
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN
INSTALLATION SITE
Improper installation may damage the machine. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the
machine is moved.
If the machine is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the machine. Operation
in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the machine at room temperature for at least
2 hours before use.
Caution
Do not install your machine in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very
• exposed to direct sunlight
dusty
• poorly
ventilated
• subject to extreme
temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an
air conditioner or
heater.
The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection and
disconnection.
3
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and
current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other electric appliances. If a lighting fixture is
connected to the same outlet, the light may flicker.
Note
Be sure to allow the required space around the
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
12" (30cm)
12"
(30cm)
12"
(30cm)
A small amount of ozone is produced within the machine during operation.
The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard.
Note:
3
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m ) calculated as an 8 hr. time-
weighted average concentration.
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the
machine in a ventilated area.
CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE
Observe the following precautions when handling the machine to maintain top performance.
Do not drop the machine, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.
Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the package before use.
• If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat, poor copies may result.
Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion).
• Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty copies.
Safety precautions:
This Digital Copier is rated Class I and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This
means that the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.
• Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.
• The machine’s exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by
inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.
This product utilizes a CR coin Lithium battery which contains a Perchlorate material. Special handling for this
material may apply, California residents, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
Others, consult local environmental officers.
4
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
®
Products that have earned the ENERGY STAR are designed to protect the environment
through superior energy efficiency.
The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada. The
products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown to the left.
The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines.
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED
SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:
www.eia.org
USING THE MANUAL
This machine has been designed to provide convenient copying features in a minimum amount of office space and
with maximum operational ease. To get full use of all machine features, be sure to familiarize yourself with this
manual and the machine. For quick reference during machine use, keep this manual in a handy location.
ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS
The operation manuals for the machine are as follows:
Operation Manual for copier (this manual)
This manual contains explanations of the product and procedures for using the machine as a copier.
Online manual (for printer)
This manual is on the CD-ROM, and explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer, network printer, and
network scanner.
Software setup guide (for printer)
This manual contains instructions for installing the software that allows the machine to be used with your computer
and procedures for establishing initial printer settings.
Operation manual (for network scanner) (When the network scanner is
installed.)
This manual contains explanations of the product and procedures for using the machine as a network scanner.
Key operator's guide
This explains key operator programs for machine management and copier related functions.
Key operator programs for the fax functions are explained in the operation manual for facsimile.
5
THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE
INDICATIONS
An "R" appearing at the end of an original or paper size (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, etc.) indicates that the original
or paper is oriented horizontally as shown below.
<Horizontal (Landscape) orientation>
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal (landscape) orientation (8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"), do not contain the
"R" in their size indication.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Warns that injury may result if the contents of the warning are not properly followed.
Warning
Caution
Note
Cautions that damage to the machine or one of its components may result if the contents of the
caution are not properly followed.
Notes provide useful information on the specifications, functions, performance, and operation of
the machine.
Explanation of words and illustration
• This operation manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".
• The illustrations in this manual show the AR-M257/AR-M317 with the optional job separator tray kit (AR-TR3)
installed.
The appearance of your machine may be different depending on the model and options installed, however, the
basic operations are the same.
RSPF
• For peripheral devices that can be installed, see "PERIPHERAL DEVICES" (p.78).
6
MAIN FEATURES
High-speed laser copying
1
2
• First-copy time* at 600 dpi* is only 4.8 seconds.
• Copying speed is 25 copies/min. (AR-M257) or 31 copies/min. (AR-M317) at 600 dpi . This is ideal for business
use and provides a big boost to workplace productivity.
1
*
First-Copy time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other operating conditions.
"dpi" ("dots per inch") is unit that is used to measure resolution. Resolution indicates how much detail can be reproduced in
a printed or scanned image.
2
*
High-quality digital image
• In addition to automatic exposure adjustment, three original type modes are available: "TEXT mode" for text-only
originals, "TEXT/PHOTO mode" for mixed text and photo originals, and "PHOTO mode" for photos. The exposure
can be manually adjusted to 5 levels in each mode.
Enhanced copying features
• Zoom copies can be made from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
• Continuous copying of up to 999 copies is possible.
• Automatic two-sided copying can be performed.
• Useful special features such as erase, margin shift, 2 in 1 and 4 in 1, pamphlet copy, dual page copy and cover
copy are available.
A
A
A
A
Erase copy
Margin shift copy
2in1 copy 4in1 copy
2
1
SHARP
Pamphlet copy
Dual page copy
Cover copy
Card shot
• Key operator programs allow the setting or modification of functions to meet your specific needs. The key operator
programs can also be used to enable audit mode, which allows the machine administrator to control use of the
machine.
Black and white LCD touch panel makes it easy to operate the machine
• Employing a backlit black and white LCD display, the touch panel provides step-by-step guidance for each function
of the machine. The touch panel even provides instructions for removing paper misfeeds and other problems that
occur.
Environment and people friendly design
• Preheat and auto power shut-off modes are provided to reduce power consumption when the machine is not in
use.
• A universal design has been implemented in the product whereby the height of the operation panel and shape of
the keys are designed to be usable by as many people as possible.
7
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
1
This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using the machine.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Exterior
3
6
2
1
7
16
8
4
5
12
11
9
17
18
19
13
14
20
21
10
15
1
9
Document feeder tray
Power switch
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up
here. (p.23)
Press to turn the machine power on and off. (p.13)
10
11
Handles
Use to move the machine.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Original guides
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Operation panel
Document feeder cover
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.67)
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
(p.10)
12
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this
tray.
Reversing tray
Pull out to remove misfed originals. (p.67)
Exit area
13
14
Center tray
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
Originals exit the machine here after copying.
Document transport cover
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.67)
Front cover
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform
machine maintenance. (p.68)
Document transport cover knob
Pull to open the document transport cover (p.67)
Document glass
Place an original that you wish to scan face down
here. (p.22)
8
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Interior
22
23
27
1
24
25
26
15
24
25
Paper trays
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper. (p.15)
Roller rotating knob
Turn to remove misfed paper. (p.68)
16
Upper right side cover
Photoconductive drum
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job
separator tray kit or a optional finisher is installed.
(p.72)
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive
drum.
Do not touch the photoconductive drum
17
18
19
20
Side cover
Open to remove misfeeds. (p.68)
Caution
(green portion). Doing so may damage the
drum and cause smudges on copies.
Side cover handle
Pull to open the side cover. (p.68)
26
Fusing unit release levers
To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push
up on these levers and remove the paper. (p.69)
Bypass tray paper guides
Adjust to the width of the paper. (p.18)
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
Warning
Bypass tray
Regular paper and special paper (such as
transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
(p.18)
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
27
Fusing unit paper guide
Open to remove misfed paper. (p.69)
21
Bypass tray extension
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing
paper in the bypass tray. (p.18)
The model name is on the front cover of the
machine.
Note
22
23
Toner cartridge lock release lever
Use to unlock the toner cartridge. (p.74)
Toner cartridge
Contains toner. (p.74)
9
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
OPERATION PANEL
COPY
PRINT
SCAN
FAX
ON LINE
DATA
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
JOB STATUS
ACC.#-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
1
3
4
Touch panel
[JOB STATUS] key
Press to display the current job status. (p.12)
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. The display will show the
status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details
see the next page.
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
Use to adjust various settings of the machine
including the contrast of the touch panel and key
operator programs. (p.54)
2
Mode select keys and indicators
Use to change modes and the corresponding
display on the touch panel.
[COPY] key
Press to select copy mode.
5
6
Numeric keys
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
[ACC.#-C] key (
)
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key
after finishing a job to return the machine to
account number entry standby.
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/
DATA indicator
Press to select print mode.
• ONLINE indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
7
[#/P] key (
)
Use this key to execute a job program in copy
mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
• DATA indicator
A print job is in memory. The indicator lights
steadily while the job is held in memory, and
blinks while the job is printed.
8
9
[CLEAR] key (
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a
job.
)
[SCAN] key/DATA indicator (When the network
scanner option is installed.)
Press to select network scan mode when the
network scanner option is installed.
• DATA indicator
Lights steadily or blinks while a scanned image
[START] key (
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to
begin copying, network scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has
activated. Press the key to return to normal
operation.
)
is being sent.
(See "Operation manual (for network
scanner)".)
10
11
[INTERRUPT] key (
Use to perform an interrupt copy job. (p.34)
[CLEAR ALL] key (
Resets the settings to the initial settings.
)
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator (When
the fax option is installed.)
Press to select fax mode when the fax option is
installed.
)
• LINE indicator
this lights up while faxes are being sent or
received.
• DATA indicator
Blinks when a fax has been received to memory
and lights steadily when a fax is waiting in
memory for transmission.
(See operation manual for facsimile.)
10
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TOUCH PANEL
Using the touch panel
Selecting a function
[Example 1]
[Example 1]
Items on the touch panel
are selected by touching
the key associated with
the item. A beep will
sound to confirm that the
item was selected and
the key will be
highlighted.
* A double-beep is
sounded when an
Items which are
CANCEL
OK
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROG
003 / 000
highlighted at the time a
screen appears are
already selected and will
take effect when the [OK]
key is touched.
LEFT
RI
BINDING BINDING
SHARP001
003 / 000
Beep
tone
1
[Example 2]
invalid key is touched.
If you need to cancel a selection, simply press the key
once again so that it is not highlighted.
[Example 2]
Keys which are grayed
out cannot be selected.
1/13
COMPLETE
1/
DUAL PAGE
COPY
MULTI SHOT
The confirmation beeps can be disabled in the key
operator programs. (See "Key operator's guide".)
The key is no longer
highlighted and the
selection is canceled.
1/
DUAL PAGE
COPY
The touch panel screens shown in this manual are
printed images and may differ from the actual screens.
MULTI SHOT
[Example 3]
When the machine is
used in copy mode or fax
mode and a special
mode is selected, a icon
representing the feature
will appear on the touch
panel. If this icon is
READY TO COPY.
ORIGINA
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
½x11
14
touched, the setting
screen of the function (or
a menu screen) will
appear, allowing the
settings to be checked,
adjusted, or canceled.
11
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Job status screen (common to copy, print, network scan and fax)
This screen appears when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
A job list showing the current job and the stored jobs or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed.
The contents of jobs can be viewed and jobs can be deleted from the queue. The following screen shows the job
queue for print jobs.
1
2
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROGRESS
003 / 000
STATUS
1
*
1/1
PAPER EMPTY
003 / 000
010 / 000
SHARP001
WAITING
WAITING
DETAIL
PRIORITY
0666211221
STOP/DELETE
PRINT JOB
SCAN
FAX JOB
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
Job list
Shows stored jobs and the job currently being
[PRINT JOB] key
Use to view the list of output jobs for all modes
(print, copy, and fax).
3
5
executed. Touch one of keys
to
in the above
illustration to select the type of job. The icon next to
each job name indicates the mode of the job as
follows:
4
5
[SCAN] key
Displays a network scanner job (When the network
scanner function is installed.).
Copy mode
Printer mode
[FAX JOB] key
This displays stored fax jobs and the fax job
currently being executed (When the fax option is
installed.).
Network scanner mode
Fax mode
Fax mode
6
7
Display switching keys
Use to change the page of the displayed job list.
(Send jobs)
(Receive jobs)
The jobs in the job list appear in the form of keys.
To give priority to a job or pause or delete a job,
touch the key of the job and then use the key
[STOP/DELETE] key
Use to pause or delete a job currently being
executed, or to delete a stored job. Copy jobs and
received faxes cannot be paused or deleted with
this key. Copy jobs can be canceled by pressing
7
8
described in
or
.
1
* :"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
indicates that the machine is out of the specified
size of paper. Add the specified size of paper. If
the specified size of paper is not available and
you are in printer mode, another size of paper
can be loaded in the bypass tray to allow printing
to take place. (See the "Online manual".)
the [CLEAR] key (
) or [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
8
9
[PRIORITY] key
Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this
[JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the
other jobs.
2
Mode switching keys
[DETAIL] key
Use to select the job list mode: "JOB QUEUE"
(Stored/currently executing jobs) or "COMPLETE"
(Finished jobs).
Shows information on the selected job. This cannot
be used for a received fax.
"JOB QUEUE":
Shows jobs that have been stored and the job that
is currently being executed.
"COMPLETE":
Shows the jobs that have been finished. Note that
copy jobs do not appear in this list.
If the power is turned off, or if auto power shut-off
mode activates when there are no jobs, the jobs in
the "COMPLETE" list will be erased.
12
POWER ON AND OFF
The power switch is located on the left side of the machine.
When the power switch is turned on, the machine starts up in the previously used mode. The following
explanations assume that the previously used mode was copy mode.
Note
POWER ON
Turn the power switch to the "ON" position.
POWER OFF
When the machine is not used for a long time, be sure
to turn it off.
Make sure that the machine is not in operation
and then turn the power switch to the "OFF"
position.
ON
1
•
When the power switch is turned to the "ON" position,
the message "WARMING UP. A COPYING JOB CAN
BE SET NOW." will appear in the message display and
the machine will start warming up. When "READY TO
COPY." appears, the machine is ready to copy. Copy
settings can be selected during warm-up.
OFF
If the power switch is turned off while the machine is in
operation, a misfeed may occur and the job that was in
progress will be canceled.
• If auditing mode is enabled, "ENTER YOUR
ACCOUNT NUMBER." will appear. When a valid
account number is entered, the account status will
appear on the main screen for several seconds.
Then copying can be performed. (See "Key
operator’s guide".)
If the fax option is installed, be sure to keep the power turned on. Faxes cannot be received when the power is
turned off.
Note
13
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INITIAL SETTINGS
The machine reverts to the initial settings when it is first turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, or
the preset "auto clear time" elapses after the last copy is made in any mode. When the machine reverts to the initial
settings, all settings and functions selected to that point are canceled. The auto clear time can be changed in the key
operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
The initial settings that appear in the display are shown below.
READY TO COPY.
0
AUTO
SPECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
Functions and settings are explained based on the above screen as applicable.
Copy ratio: 100%, Exposure: Automatic, Copy quantity: 0, Automatic two-sided: One side to One side,
Auto paper selection: On,
Paper tray: Upper paper tray
The initial settings can be changed in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
For the initial settings (initial screen) of printer, fax, and scanner modes, see the operation manuals of those
Note
modes.
POWER SAVE MODES
The machine has two power save modes to reduce overall power consumption and thereby reduce the cost of
operation. These modes help conserve natural resources and reduce environmental pollution. The two power save
modes are "Preheat mode" and "Auto power shut-off mode".
The time settings for each mode can be changed in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Preheat mode
When the set time elapses, the temperature of the fusing unit is automatically lowered to reduce power consumption
while on standby. The factory default setting is 15 minutes. To return to normal operation, touch any key on the
operation panel. To make a copy when the machine is in this mode, simply select the desired copy selections and
then press the [START] key (
).
Auto power shut-off mode
When the set time elapses, the power to the fusing unit automatically turns off to reduce power consumption (This is
based on the guidelines of the International Energy Star Program.). The factory default setting is 60 minutes. When
the machine enters this mode, the touch panel screen turns off and only the [START] key (
normal operation, press the [START] key ( ). To copy after warm-up starts, make desired copy selections and
press the [START] key ( ). When the machine receives a fax or a print job, Auto power shut-off mode
) blinks. To return to
automatically deactivates and the machine returns to normal operation.
14
LOADING PAPER
When a tray runs out of paper, a message appears in the touch panel. Load paper in the tray.
OPEN TRAY 1 AND ADD PAPER.
0
ORIGINAL 8½x11
AUTO
SPECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
PAPER
1
The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.
For best results, use only SHARP recommended paper.
Tray
No.
Paper tray type
Paper type
Plain paper
Letterhead paper
Recycled paper
Color paper
Size
Weight
Capacity
*1
4
1
Upper paper tray
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 15 lbs. to 28 lbs.
11" x 17"
(A5 to A3)
500 sheets*
(56 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
*2
2
Lower paper tray
3
500-sheet paper
feed unit/
Upper paper tray of
2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit
4
Lower paper tray of
2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit
4
Bypass tray
Plain paper
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 15 lbs. to 34.5 lbs.
100 sheets*
2
2
*3
2
Letterhead paper
Recycled paper
Color paper
11" x 17"
(56
g/m to 128
g/m )
(A6 to A3)
Thin paper
14 lbs. to 15 lbs.
100 sheets
30 sheets
2
(52 g/m to 56 g/m )
Heavy paper
Max. 54 lbs.
2
(200 g/m )
Labels
40 sheets
40 sheets
5 sheets
Transparency film
Envelope International DL
(110 x 220 mm)
International C5
(162 x 229 mm)
Commercial 10
(4-1/8" x 9-1/2")
1
* 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be loaded in tray 1 and the bypass tray.
2
* B5 size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2 (However, B5R paper can be loaded.).
2
3
* When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size, do not use paper of weight greater than 28 lbs. (105 g/m ).
4
* The number of sheets of paper which can be loaded varies depending on the weight of the paper.
15
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Special papers
Follow these guidelines when using special papers.
• Use SHARP recommended transparency film and
label sheets. Using other than SHARP
Envelopes
Do not use the following envelopes (Misfeeds will
occur.).
• Envelopes with metal tabs, clasps, strings, holes, or
windows.
• Envelopes with rough fibers, carbon paper, or glossy
surfaces.
recommended paper may result in misfeeds or
smudges on the output. If other than SHARP
recommended media must be used, feed each
sheet one at a time using the bypass tray (Do not
attempt continuous copying or printing.).
• Envelopes with two or more flaps.
• Envelopes with tape, film, or paper attached to the
flap.
• Envelopes with a fold in the flap.
• Envelopes with glue on the flap to be moistened for
sealing.
• Envelopes with labels or stamps.
• Envelopes that are slightly inflated with air.
• Envelopes with glue protruding from the seal area.
• Envelopes with part of the seal area peeled off.
• There are many varieties of special paper available
on the market, and some cannot be used with this
machine. Before using special paper, contact a
SHARP service center.
• Before using other than SHARP recommended
paper, make a test copy to see if the paper is
suitable.
Letterhead paper
Letterhead paper is paper with information pre-printed
at the top such as a company name and address.
SHARP
16
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER
Make sure that the machine is not copying, printing, or printing a received fax, and then follow these steps to load paper.
Loading the paper in the paper tray
Pull out the paper tray until it stops.
Load paper in the tray.
1
5
If you are loading the
same size of paper as
was loaded previously,
go to step 4. If you are
loading a different size of
paper, continue with the
following step.
Maximum height line
1
•
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Squeeze the lock lever of the front
guide and slide the front guide to
match the width of the paper.
Note
• Insert the paper along the guides.
• The tray holds up to 500 sheets of 21 lb.
2
2
(80g/m ) bond paper.
• Do not load paper above the maximum
height line.
Front guide
• When adding paper, first remove any
paper remaining in the tray, combine it
with the paper to be added, and then
reload as a single stack.
Left guide
Push the paper tray firmly back into
the machine.
6
Move the left guide to the appropriate
3
slot as marked on the tray.
When using 11" x 17"
copy paper, store the left
guide in the slot at the left
front of the paper tray.
If you loaded a different size of paper that was loaded
previously, place the appropriate paper size card in the
front of the paper tray to indicate the new paper size.
Fan the copy paper.
4
Paper size card
If you loaded a different size of paper that
Note
was loaded previously, go to "CHANGING A
TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS" (p.19).
17
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Loading paper in the bypass tray
Unfold the bypass tray.
Insert the copy paper (print side
down) all the way into the bypass tray.
1
3
To enable correct
detection of the paper
size, be sure to pull out
the bypass tray
extension.
Set the paper guides to the copy
paper width.
2
Important points when inserting paper in the bypass tray
• Be sure to place envelopes horizontally as shown in
the following diagram.
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.
Landscape
orientation
Portrait
orientation
• When loading envelopes, make sure that they are
straight and flat and do not have loosely glued
construction flaps (not the closure flap).
• When adding paper, first remove any paper
remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the
paper to be added, and then reload as a single
stack. The paper to be added must be the same size
and type as the paper already in the bypass tray.
• Do not use paper that is smaller than the original
image. This may cause smudges or unclean images.
• Do not use paper that has already been printed on
by a laser printer or plain paper fax machine. This
may cause smudges or unclean images.
18
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS
When you change the paper in a tray, follow the steps below to change the tray’s paper type and paper size settings.
The settings cannot be changed when operation has stopped because the paper ran out or a misfeed occurred, or
when an interrupt copy job is being performed.
Even in copy mode, the settings cannot be changed while a print job or received fax is being printed.
• 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be set for tray 1.
Note
• B5 size paper cannot be set for tray 2 (However, B5R size paper can be set.).
• Tray settings for trays other than the bypass tray can be prohibited in the key operator programs. (See the "Key
operator's guide".)
1
Load paper in the tray as explained in
"Loading the paper in the paper tray"
(p.17).
Select the size and type of paper that
is loaded in the tray.
1
5
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
TRAY 1 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
TYPE
SIZE
AB
INCH
8½x13
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
2
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
11x17
8½x11
8½x14
RECYCLED
8½x11R
5½x8½
The custom settings
menu screen will appear.
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
The currently selected paper type will be highlighted.
• To change the paper type selection, touch the
appropriate type key.
• To change the paper size selection, touch the
appropriate size key.
•
To change the displayed size selections to AB sizes,
touch [AB INCH].
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
3
TOTAL COUNT
The tray settings screen
will appear.
CONTRA
Touch the [OK] key.
6
ADDRES
TRAY SETTINGS
CONTRO
A message appears prompting you to
check the paper in the tray. Check the
paper and then touch the [OK] key.
7
KEYB
KEY
SELECT
You will return to the tray settings screen.
Select the tray in which you loaded
paper.
4
For the tray numbers,
TYPE / SIZE
see "PAPER" (p.15).
If the desired tray does
not appear in the display,
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / 8½x11
LAIN / 8½x14
use the
key or
key
to scroll until it appears.
PLAIN / 11x17
19
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray
Use either of the following two methods to set the bypass tray's paper type setting.
From the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
From the [PAPER SELECT] key
Load paper in the bypass tray as
explained in "Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
Load paper in the bypass tray as
explained in "Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
1
1
2
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.
2
The custom settings
menu screen will appear.
EXPOSURE
LINE
DATA
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
100%
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
Touch the paper type selection key.
3
3
TOTAL COUNT
The tray settings screen
CONTRA
READY TO COPY.
0
will appear.
ADDRES
TRAY SETTINGS
AUTO
CONTRO
11x17
PLAIN
8½x11
8½x14
EXPOSURE
RECYCLED
PLAIN
KEYB
KEY
PAPER SELECT
SELECT
EXTRA
ADJUST
100%
COPY RATIO
Touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key.
4
Select the paper type.
4
TYPE / SIZE
READY TO COPY.
0
TRAY 4
PLAIN / 11x17
AUTO
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
ENVELOPE
LABELS
BYPASS
TRAY
EXPOSURE
PLAIN
RECYCLED
PAPER SELECT
HEAVY APER
THIN PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
JAPANESE P/C
100%
COPY RATIO
Select the type of paper that is loaded
in the tray.
5
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in
Japan.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
BYPASS TRAY TYPE SETTING
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.
5
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
ENVELOPE
LABELS
JAPANESE P/C
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
RECYCLED
HEAVY PAPE
THIN PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in
Japan.
Touch the [OK] key.
6
You will return to the tray settings screen.
20
Chapter 2
COPY FUNCTIONS
2
This chapter explains basic copying functions such as normal copying, reduction or enlargement, and exposure
adjustment.
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE
The main screen of copy mode shows messages, keys, and settings that are used for copying. Touch a key to make
a selection. The main screen of copy mode appears when the [COPY] key is pressed (Except when the custom
settings screen appears.).
COPY
ON LINE
PRINT
DATA
SCAN
FAX
DATA
LINE
DATA
JOB STATUS
CUSTOM SETTINGS
ACC.#-C
1
2
READY TO COPY.
0
8½x11
ORIGINAL
9
10
AUTO
EXPOSURE
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
11
12
AUTO
8½x11
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
13
14
100%
COPY RATIO
The screen will vary depending on the
equipment installed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
8
9
Message display
Status messages are displayed here.
Copy number display
Displays the selected number of copies before the
[START] key ( ) is pressed or the number of
remaining copies after the [START] key ( ) is
pressed. A single copy can be made when "0" is
displayed.
Original size display
Displays the original size only when an original is
placed for copying.
Exposure display
Displays the icon of the selected exposure type
and the exposure scale.
10
11
[EXPOSURE] key (p.29)
Use this key to adjust the copy exposure.
3
4
[2-SIDED COPY] key (p.27)
Touch to open the duplex copy mode setting screen.
Paper select display
Displays the selected paper size. When auto paper
select mode is selected, "AUTO" appears when
auto paper select mode is selected.
[PAPER SELECT] key (p.22, p.26)
Use this key to select the paper size.
Copy ratio display
[OUTPUT] key (p.35)
Touch to select sort, group, staple sort, and other
output settings.
12
13
5
6
[SPECIAL MODES] key (p.39)
Touch to open the special modes selection screen.
Original feed display
Displays the selected copy ratio.
This appears when an original is placed in the
RSPF.
Paper size display
14
[COPY RATIO] key (p.31)
Use this key to select the copy ratio.
7
This shows the location of the paper trays, the size of
the paper in the trays. "
" indicates whether or not
there is paper. A paper tray can be touched to change
the paper tray selection.
21
NORMAL COPYING
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS
If "AUDITING MODE" (p.58) has been enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.
Note
•
•
To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"
Open the RSPF and place the original
face down on the document glass.
1
Note
(p.15). If you change the paper size in the
tray, you will also need to change the tray's
paper size and paper type settings. (p.19)
The paper types for the auto paper selection
function can be selected, or the function
disabled, in the key operator programs. (See
the "Key operator's guide".)
Manually selecting the paper size (paper tray)
If auto paper selection is disabled in the key operator
programs, or if you wish to use a different size of paper
than the original, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and
select the paper tray with the desired paper size. (The
selected paper will be highlighted and the paper selecting
screen will close.)
[How to place the original]
Align the corner or the original with the tip of the arrow
(
) at the left rear corner of the glass as shown in the
illustration.
To close the screen without selecting a paper size, touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key again.
Original scale
Original scale
READY TO COPY.
0
AUTO
PLAIN
11x17
PLAIN
1.8½x11
2.8½x14
EXPOSURE
5-1/2" x
8-1/2"
8-1/2" x
14"
RECYCLED
R
8-1/2" x 11"
PAPER SELECT
8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17"
EXTRA IMAGE
ADJUST
100%
COPY RATIO
Close the RSPF.
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
2
3
4
The original size appears
in the touch panel.
ACC.#-C
If the original size is not automatically
detected, manually set the original size. (p.47)
Note
• The number in the copy quantity display will
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be
made with the copy number display showing "0".
Make sure that the same size of paper
as the original is automatically
selected.
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• Press the [CLEAR] key (
copying in the middle of a run.
) to stop
The selected tray is
highlighted. If the tray
contains a different size of
paper than the original,
"LOAD xxxx PAPER." will
appear.
Note
8½x11
ORIGINAL
AUTO
• To repeat the same copy sequence for a
different original, simply replace the
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x
original and press the [START] key ( ).
• If copying stops because the tray has run
out of paper, you can resume copying by
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray
that has the same size and type of paper
loaded in the same orientation.
8½x11
PAPER SELE
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATI
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can
be performed using the selected paper tray.
22
COPY FUNCTIONS
COPYING FROM THE RSPF
• If "AUDITING MODE" (p.58) is enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.
• If the RSPF is disabled in the key operator programs, the RSPF cannot be used. See the "Key operator's
guide".
Note
• To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"
Make sure that an original has not
been left on the document glass and
then close the RSPF.
1
Note
(p.15). If you change the paper size in the
tray, you will also need to change the
tray's paper size and paper type settings.
(p.19)
• If needed, manually select the paper tray
that has the desired size of paper as
explained on page 22.
If an original remains on
the document glass after a
copy was made,
"REMOVE THE
•
The paper types for the auto paper selection
function can be selected, or the function
disabled, in the key operator programs. (See
the "Key operator's guide".)
ORIGINAL FROM THE
DOCUMENT GLASS." will
appear in the touch panel.
2
• If the original size is larger than the paper
size, the result of copying from the
document glass may differ from the result
of copying from the RSPF. (p.22)
Adjust the original guides to the size
of the original.
2
3
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
5
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
ACC.#-C
Insert the originals all the
way into the feed slot.
The original size appears
in the touch panel.
• The number in the copy quantity display will
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be
made with the copy number display showing "0".
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• Press the [CLEAR] key (
copying in the middle of a run.
) to stop
Note
2
• Up to 100 pages (24 lbs. (90 g/m )) can
Note
• If copying stops because the tray has run
out of paper, you can resume copying by
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray
that has the same size and type of paper
loaded in the same orientation.
be inserted at once.
• If the original size is not automatically
detected, manually set the original size.
(p.47)
Make sure that the same size of paper
as the original is selected.
4
Stream feeding mode
If stream feeding mode is enabled in the key operator
programs, "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM
FEEDING." will appear in the touch panel for
approximately 5 seconds after the originals are fed.
Any new originals placed in the RSPF while this
message appears will be fed and copied automatically.
The selected tray is
highlighted. If none of the
8½x11
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
trays have the same size
of paper as the original,
"LOAD xxxx PAPER."
will appear.
AUTO
8½x
8½x11
PAPER SELE
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATI
Copying a large number of originals
Job Build mode is useful when you need to copy more
originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once. For
information on Job Build mode, see "JOB BUILD
MODE" (p.45).
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can
be performed using the selected paper tray.
23
COPY FUNCTIONS
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES
Document glass and RSPF
• Paper in a different orientation from the original can be selected if the auto paper select or auto image function has
been selected. In this case, the image of the original will be rotated.
• When copying a book or an original that has been folded or crumpled, press down gently on the RSPF. This will
reduce shadow lines caused by uneven contact between the original and the document glass.
• When the center tray counter function is enabled, the number of pages that can be delivered to the output tray is
limited to 500 (A4 and 8-1/2" x 14" sizes only; the limit for all other sizes is 300 pages.). When the offset function is
used, the limit is approximately 300 pages. When the limit is reached, copying stops and the [START] key (
)
light turns off. Remove the copies from the center tray and then press the [START] key ( ) to resume copying.
The center tray counter function can be disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Originals that can be used in the RSPF
A maximum of 100 sheet originals of equal size (8-1/2" x 11", 24 lbs. (90g/m )) can be placed in the RSPF. Originals
2
of different length can be placed together in the RSPF as long the widths are equal; however, some copy functions
may not operate correctly.
Acceptable originals
2
2
Originals of size 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" having a weight of 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35g/m to 128g/m ) or 14 lbs. to 28
2
2
lbs. (52g/m to 105g/m ) for two-sided originals can be used.
Other considerations
• Use originals that are within the specified size and weight ranges. Originals outside the specified ranges may
cause misfeeds.
• Make sure that there are no paper clips or staples on the original.
• If an original has damp spots from correction fluid or ink, or glue from pasteups, be sure it has dried completely
before using it to make a copy. Otherwise the interior of the RSPF or the document glass may become soiled.
• The following originals cannot be used. These may cause misfeeds, smudging, and unclear images.
• Transparencies, tracing paper, other transparent or translucent paper, photographs
• Carbon paper
• Thermal paper
• Originals that are creased, folded, or torn
• Glued originals, cut-out originals
• Originals with binder holes
• Originals printed using an ink ribbon (thermal transfer printing), originals printed on thermal transfer paper
24
COPY FUNCTIONS
Copying originals of mixed length (Mixed feeding)
When using the RSPF, originals of mixed length can be fed together as long as the width of the originals is the same.
To copy originals of mixed length, follow these steps:
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
1
2
3
4
The setting is entered and
you return to the main
screen.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
The original size icon
changes to ( ) to indicate
that mixed feeding is
selected.
8½x11
When copying is started in mixed feeding
mode, all originals are scanned before
copying begins.
Touch the
key and then the
Note
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key.
2
ORIGINAL
SIZE
C
Select the "MIX SIZE ORIGINAL
FEEDING MODE" checkbox.
ORIGINAL SIZE
OK
AUTO
MANUAL
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation copying)
If the originals are placed in a different orientation than the copy paper, the original image will be automatically
rotated 90°. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable for
rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size or margin shift copy, rotation will not be
possible.
[Example]
Orientation of
the placed original
Orientation of
the loaded paper
Copy after rotation
Face down
Face down
• This function operates in both the auto paper select and auto image modes. Rotation copying can be disabled in
the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator's guide".)
25
COPY FUNCTIONS
BYPASS FEED (special paper)
The bypass tray must be used to feed special papers such as transparency film and labels. The bypass tray can also
be used to feed standard copy paper.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
1
2
4
Insert the paper (print face down) all
the way into the bypass tray.
For paper that can be
used in the bypass tray,
see "PAPER" (p.15).
To load paper, see
ACC.#-C
"Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key or
the tray in the image of the machine in
the touch panel, and select the bypass
tray.
3
Set the type of paper that
EXPOSURE
you loaded in the bypass
tray. (p.20)
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
100%
Shifting the starting position of copying
When copying on a special size of paper in the bypass tray, the starting position of printing can be shifted vertically
for fine adjustment of the image position. To adjust the starting position of printing, follow the steps below. This
function can only be used when feeding special sizes of paper from the bypass tray.
1 Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then touch the [EXTRA
READY TO COPY.
0
IMAGE ADJUST] key on the bypass tray.
OK
EXTRA IMAGE ADJUST
2 Use the
key or
key to adjust the printing position, and
then touch the [OK] key.
(-0.5 0.5)
inch
0.00
• The position can be adjusted from -0.5 inch to +0.5 inch in 0.02
inch increments.
TO FRONT TO REAR
•
When a setting from -0.5 inch to -0.02 inch is selected, the starting
position of printing is moved to front from the standard position. When
a setting from +0.02 inch to +0.5 inch is selected, the starting position
of printing is moved to rear.
26
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING
Two originals can be automatically copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. When the RSPF is used,
two-sided copies of two-sided originals can easily be made.
Original → Paper
One-sided original → Two sides (
)
Document glass
One-sided original
Two-sided original
Two-sided original
→ Two sides
→ Two sides
→ One side
(
)
(
)
(
)
RSPF
2
• Paper sizes that can be used are 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 14" and 11" x 17" (A5, B5,
B5R, A4, A4R, B4, and A3).
Note
• When making two-sided copies on letterhead paper, place the side with the letterhead face down if using a
tray, or face up if using the bypass tray (This is the opposite of normal.).
•
Automatic two-sided copying is not possible on thick paper, thin paper, labels, transparency film, envelopes, and
other special types of paper.
• Automatic two-sided copying can be disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
When dual page copy (p.43) is selected, two-sided original to two sides or two-sided original to one side cannot be used.
•
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the tablet
Place the original on the document
glass. (p.22)
1
2
binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies of a
one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait original,
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Portrait-oriented original
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
Touch the [OK] key.
4
Touch the [One-sided to two-sided
copy] key.
3
OK
BINDG
CHANGE
27
COPY FUNCTIONS
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
Remove the first original and then place
the original for the back side on the
document glass. Close the RSPF and
then press the [START] key ( ).
5
7
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
To cancel automatic
EXPOSURE
two-sided copying, press
the [CLEAR] key (
).
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
100%
When making two-sided copies of an odd
number of originals, touch the [READ-END]
key after scanning the last original.
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
The original for the front
6
Note
side is scanned.
ACC.#-C
USING THE RSPF
Place the original(s) in the document
feeder tray. (p.23)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
4
5
OK
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
2
BINDG
CHANGE
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
Touch the desired copy mode.
3
EXPOSURE
Y TO COPY.
D COPY
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
BIN
CHA
100%
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
6
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the
tablet binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies
of a one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait
original, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
Portrait-oriented original
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]
ACC.#-C
28
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
[AUTO] is selected by default for automatic adjustment of the image according to the original. If you wish to specify
the original image type or manually adjust the exposure, place the original in the RSPF or on the document glass,
check the paper size, and then perform the following steps.
Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
Manually adjust the copy exposure.
1
3
If [TEXT] was selected
0
for the original image
type, touch the [AUTO
MANUAL] key to
AUTO
1
3
5
EXPOSURE
select [MANUAL] and
then adjust the copy
exposure.
2
Touch the
Touch the
key to make darker copies.
key to make lighter copies.
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO], or
[PHOTO] as appropriate for the
original.
2
Exposure value guidelines
1 - 2 Dark originals like newspapers
Note
3
Normal originals
4 - 5 Light colored text or text written in
pencil
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE
TEXT
AUTO
TEXT/PHOTO
To change back to automatic exposure adjustment,
follow these steps:
1
3
PHOTO
1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.
The [AUTO
MANUAL] key appears when [TEXT]
is selected.
3 Touch the [AUTO
[AUTO] is highlighted.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
Selecting the original image type
• Four original image type selections are available.
MANUAL] key so that
Use for regular text, blueprints,
TEXT
and light pencil writing.
Use for mixed text/photo originals
TEXT/PHOTO
Touch the [OK] key.
4
and printed photos.
Use for photos and when you
PHOTO
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
desire clearer halftones.
Check the paper size, select the
5
• Automatic exposure adjustment can only be selected
when [TEXT] is selected for the original image type.
number of copies and any other
desired copy settings, and then press
the [START] key ( ).
6
ACC.#-C
29
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
There are three ways to enlarge and reduce copies:
● Automatic ratio selection according to the paper size ........................... AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (below)
● Specifying a ratio with the reduce key, enlarge key, or zoom key..................MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (p.31)
● Separately selecting vertical and horizontal ratios ...........................................................XY ZOOM copying (p.32)
Ratios that can be selected vary depending on the following conditions:
Original position
Selectable ratios
Document glass
RSPF
25 to 400%
50 to 200%
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION
The ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and paper size.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
• When automatic ratio selection is
selected, the [AUTO IMAGE] key is
highlighted in the main screen.
1
Note
The original size appears in the touch panel.
•
If the original and paper are in different
orientations, the image is automatically
rotated to match the paper orientation (for
paper sizes 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) or less).
• If the original size does not appear in the
touch panel, specify the original size
manually. (p.47)
Note
• Rotation of the image can be disabled in
the key operator programs. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY
PAPER." appears in the touch panel, part
of the image will be cut off in the copy.
• Automatic ratio selection is not possible if
the original or paper is a non-standard
size.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and
then select the desired paper size.
The selected key is
2
Select the number of copies and any
other desired settings, and then press
the [START] key ( ).
4
highlighted and the paper
selection screen closes.
PLAIN
8½x11
8½x
RECYCLED
ACC.#-C
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in
any of the trays, load paper of the required
size in a paper tray or in the bypass tray.
(p.19)
Note
To cancel automatic ratio selection, touch
Note
the [AUTO IMAGE] key. Automatic ratio
selection also turns off automatically when
the enlargement key, the reduction key, or a
Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.
3
AUTO
A suitable ratio is
[ZOOM] key
the ratio to be selected.
(
/
)
is touched to allow
PAPER
selected based on the
1
4
original size and selected
AUTO
1
paper size. (The ratio
appears in the touch
panel.)
IMAGE
COPY
30
COPY FUNCTIONS
MANUAL RATIO SELECTION
There are four preset reduction ratios and four preset enlargement ratios.
In addition, the [ZOOM] keys (
,
) can be pressed to select the ratio in increments of 1%.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Use the enlargement key or reduction
1
2
4
key, or the [ZOOM] key (
the desired copy ratio.
/
) to set
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
100
%
1
ZOOM
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
64%
77%
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
ZOOM
121%
12
100%
1
2
MENU
COPY RATIO
The [ZOOM] keys
) can be used to
change the ratio in
increments of 1%
2
(
/
77
ZOOM
%
Use the [MENU] key to select menu
3
1x17
½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
[
] or menu [ ] for copy ratio
%
77
Touch the
key to
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
½x14
11x17
121%
129
selection.
increase the ratio or the
key to decrease the
ratio. Continuing to touch
XY ZOOM
MENU
1
2
Menu
READY TO COPY.
a [ZOOM] key (
makes the ratio change
faster.
/
)
0
OK
AUTO
100
ZOOM
%
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
100%
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
64%
77%
PAPER SELECT
• Touch a reduction or enlargement key to
set the approximate ratio, then touch the
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
11x17
121%
129%
Note
AUTO
IMAGE
COPY RATIO
XY ZOOM
MENU
1
2
[
[
] key to decrease the ratio or the
] key to increase the ratio.
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY
PAPER." appears, the selected copy ratio
is too large for the paper size. However, if
you press the [START] key ( ), a copy
will be made.
•
•
Preset reduction keys :
Preset enlargement keys : 121%, 129%
64%, 77%
• [100%] key
100%
Menu
Touch the [OK] key.
5
READY TO COPY.
0
OK
AUTO
EXPOSURE
100
ZOOM
%
OK
%
AUTO
8½x11
EX
100%
25%
50%
200%
400%
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
10
x17
x14
8½x14
8½x11
AUTO
IMAGE
77%
PAPE
COPY RATIO
11x17
8½x11
x11
x8½
1
2
XY ZOOM
MENU
129%
AUTO
IMAGE
COP
1
2
•
•
Preset reduction keys :
Preset enlargement keys : 200%, 400%
100%
25%, 50%
• [100%] key
31
COPY FUNCTIONS
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
6
7
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
If AUTO PAPER
SELECT is enabled, the
EXPOSURE
appropriate copy paper
size is automatically
selected based on the
original size and selected
copy ratios.
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
ACC.#-C
77%
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the
[COPY RATIO] key to display the ratio menu
Note
and then touch the [100%] key. (p.31, step
3)
SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL COPY
RATIOS SEPARATELY (XY ZOOM copying)
The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed independently.
Example: Vertical ratio set to 100% and horizontal ratio set to 50%.
Original
Copy
• The AUTO IMAGE/MULTI SHOT/PAMPHLET COPY feature cannot be used in combination with the XY ZOOM
function.
Note
• To use the XY ZOOM feature with the DUAL PAGE COPY feature (p.43), set the DUAL PAGE COPY feature
first and then the XY ZOOM feature.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.
1
2
3
11x1
8½x1
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
64%
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
8½x1
5½x8
8½x14
11x17
121%
1
PAPER SELECT
XY ZOOM
MENU
100%
COPY RATIO
32
COPY FUNCTIONS
Touch the [X] key.
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
4
5
7
[ZOOM] keys (
/
) to change the
The [X] key is selected
(highlighted) by default,
so there is normally no
need to perform this step
(Go to step 5.).
If the [X] key is not
highlighted, perform this
step.
copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.
1
X
100
100
A fixed ratio key will not
become highlighted
when touched.
77%
64%
50%
X
Y
2
4
ZOOM
X
Y
50
70
If you need to readjust
the horizontal ratio, touch
the [X] key again.
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
[ZOOM] keys ( ) to change the
/
copy ratio in the horizontal (X)
direction.
ZOOM
A fixed ratio key will not
2
become highlighted
when touched.
CANCEL
ZOOM
64%
50%
Y
Touch the [OK] key.
8
Y ZOOM
OK
129%
E
The [ZOOM] keys
200%
(
/
) can be used to
100%
4%
Y
100
PAP
change the ratio in
increments of 1%
400%
ZOOM
0%
Touch the
key to
increase the ratio, or the
key to decrease the
ratio. Continuing to touch
CANCEL
XY ZOOM
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
9
a [ZOOM] key (
/
)
makes the ratio change
faster.
If AUTO PAPER
EXPOSURE
SELECT is enabled, the
appropriate copy paper
size is automatically
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set
the approximate ratio, then touch the [
Note
]
AUTO 8½x11
key to decrease the ratio or the [
increase the ratio.
] key to
PAPER SELECT
selected based on the
original size and selected
X-50% Y-70%
copy ratios.
Touch the [Y] key.
6
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
10
X
Y
50
100
OM
To cancel this function, touch the [CANCEL]
key in the XY ZOOM screen.
Note
33
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
A copy run can be temporarily interrupted to allow another copy job to be performed. When the other job is finished,
the copy run will resume using the original copy settings.
Automatic two-sided copying, sort/group copying, staple sort, pamphlet copy, job build, cover copy, job build, job
programs, or multi shot copying cannot be used for interrupt copying.
Note
Press the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) to
interrupt the copy run.
When the copy job is finished, press
the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) and remove
the original(s).
1
4
5
The [INTERRUPT] key
( ) blinks until the
machine is ready for the
interrupt job, after which
it lights steadily.
If you decide to cancel
the interrupt job while
selecting settings, press
the [INTERRUPT] key
( ).
Replace the previous original(s) and
press the [START] key ( ) to resume
copying.
• If audit mode is enabled, a message will
appear prompting you to enter your
Note
account number. Enter your account
number with the numeric keys. The copies
that you make will be added to your
account’s count.
Replace only the originals that have not yet been
scanned.
• If an original is being scanned when the
[INTERRUPT] key ( ) is pressed, the
interrupt job will begin after the original is
scanned. If a copy is being printed, the
interrupt job will begin after the copy is
printed.
Remove the previous original(s) and
place the original(s) of the interrupt
copy job. (p.22, p.23)
2
3
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
The interrupt copies will
be offset from the
previous copies. (Offset
function, p.35)
ACC.#-C
34
Chapter 3
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
3
This chapter explains special finishing functions and other convenient functions.
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS
This section explains the sort, group, and offset functions, as well as the staple sort function which is used to staple
output collated with the sort function when a finisher is installed.
SORT COPY
This function is used to collate sets of copies. The
copies are delivered to the center tray, and to other
trays when a job separator tray or finisher is installed.
GROUP COPY
This function is used to group sets of copies by page.
The copies are delivered to the center tray, and to
other trays when a job separator tray or finisher is
installed.
3
2
3
2
1
1
OFFSET FUNCTION
Each set of copies is offset from the previous set in the
output tray, making it easy to distinguish one set from
another. (The offset function can be used in the center
tray or in the offset tray of the finisher.)
Offset function "ON"
Offset function "OFF"
Enabling the offset function
The offset function operates when a checkmark
appears in the [OFFSET] checkbox, which is displayed
by touching the [OUTPUT] key. (If a checkmark does
not appear, touch the checkbox.)
35
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Place the originals in the RSPF or on
the document glass. (p.22, p.23)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
5
6
If originals are placed in
the RSPF, the sort
function is automatically
selected. (To disable this
function, see the "Key
operator’s guide".)
OK
OFFSET
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
Example: 5 sets of copies or 5 copies per page of 3
originals
Originals
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.
2
ACC.#-C
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all the originals are
scanned.
7
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
Touch the [SORT] or [GROUP] key.
3
UPPER
OUTPUT
TRAY
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
SORT
CENTER
TRAY
READ-END
GROUP
Touch the output tray that you wish to
4
The copies are grouped as follows:
Sort Group
use.
The output tray can only
UPPER
TRAY
Copy
Copy
be selected when a job
separator or finisher is
installed.
CENTER
TRAY
5 sets of copies
5 copies per page
To enable the offset function (p.35), touch the
If the memory becomes full while scanning the
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,
press the [START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Note
[OFFSET] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears. To disable the offset function, touch
the [OFFSET] checkbox again to clear the
checkmark.
The number of originals that can be scanned
Note
into memory can be increased by increasing
the memory allocation in the key operator
programs, or by installing more memory. (See
the "Key operator’s guide".)
36
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
STAPLE SORT
(when the finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed)
This function collates the copies, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the offset tray. The staple sort function
can only be used when a finisher is installed.
In addition to the staple sort function, other functions such as the pamphlet staple function can be used when the
saddle stitch finisher (AR-F14N) is installed. For detailed information, see the manual that accompanies the saddle
stitch finisher.
Stapling position
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Top left corner
Available paper sizes:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4 and B5)
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled.
Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"
x 11" R, (A3, B4 and A4R)
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled.
ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND STAPLING
POSITIONS
If the orientation of the originals does not match that of the copy paper, the images will be rotated. The stapling
position varies with the orientation of the original.
3
Using the RSPF
Using the document glass
Insert the originals face up.
Place each original face down.
Stapling position
Stapling position
When copying 8-1/2" x 14" or 11" x 17" (B4 or A3) vertically oriented originals, the copies will be stapled at the
position shown below.
Stapling position
Stapling position
Document glass
RSPF
• When using letterhead paper in the staple sort, load the paper with the letterhead to
the front or to the right as shown in the diagram.
Note
S H A
• Different sized originals cannot be copied on the corresponding sizes of paper.
• The staple sort function cannot be used if disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s
guide".)
• The offset function (p.35) cannot be used.
37
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
1
6
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.
2
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
Touch the [STAPLE SORT] key.
3
If the memory becomes full while scanning the
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,
press the [START] key ( ). To cancel the job, press
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
When the [STAPLE
SORT] key is selected,
the offset tray is
automatically selected as
OUTPUT
TOP TRAY
SORT
STAPLE
SORT
the output tray. The top
OFFSET
tray and center tray
GROUP
TRAY
cannot be used.
The number of originals that can be scanned
Note
into memory can be increased by increasing
the memory allocation in the key operator
programs, or by installing more memory. (See
the "Key operator’s guide".)
Touch the [OK] key.
4
OK
CENTER TRAY
OFFSET
Select the number of copies and other
copy settings, and then press the
[START] key ( ).
5
38
SPECIAL MODES
When the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode is touched, the special modes screen will
appear. This screen contains the following special function keys.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]
key in the main screen
READY COPY.
0
ORIGINAL 8½x11
AUTO
PECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
1
2
3
8
9
10
OK
OK
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES
3
2/2
B/W
REVERSE
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
ORIGINAL
SIZE
MARGIN SHIFT
ERASE
COVER
JOB
BUILD
PAMPHLET COPY
MULTI SHOT
CARD SHOT
4
5
6
7
11
12
1
2
7
[MARGIN SHIFT] key (p.41)
Use this to shift the image on the copy paper to
create binding margins.
(
) key, ( ) key
Use these to change pages in the special functions
screen.
8
9
[ERASE] key (p.42)
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key (p.47)
Use this to erase peripheral shadows that occur
when making copies of books and other thick
originals.
Use to manually select the original size. When the
original size is selected, the auto ratio select
function will automatically select an appropriate
ratio based on the paper size.
3
4
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key (p.43)
Use this to make separate copies of the left and
right pages of bound documents.
[COVER] key (p.48)
Press this to use a different type of paper for front
and back covers (When the RSPF is used.).
[PAMPHLET COPY] key (p.44)
10
11
[B/W REVERSE] key (p.50)
Use to reverse black and white areas.
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange
copies in the proper order for center-stapling and
folding into a booklet. Two original pages are
copied onto each side of the paper, such that a
total of four pages are copied onto one sheet.
[CARD SHOT] key (p.51)
The front and reverse sides of a card can be
copied onto one sheet of paper.
5
6
[JOB BUILD] key (p.45)
12
[OK] key
Use this when you need to copy more originals
than can be placed in the RSPF at once. This
allows you to divide the originals into sets and
scan them sequentially in the RSPF.
Touch to return to the main screen of the copy
mode.
Some functions cannot be used in
[MULTI SHOT] key (p.46)
Note
combination with each other. If a prohibited
combination of functions has been selected, a
message will appear in the touch panel.
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or
four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in any
of four layout patterns.
39
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
1
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
Touch the key of the desired special
mode.
2
Example:
Selecting the margin shift
function
MARGIN SHIFT
PAMPHLET COPY
Procedures for modes that require further settings
are explained starting on the next page.
40
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
MARGIN SHIFT COPY
The margin shift function is used to automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 1/2" in its
initial setting.
• Right, left or down can be
selected for the shift direction
as shown in the illustration.
Image shifted
down
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
One-sided copying
Margin
• The shift width (margin) can
be set from 0" to 1" in
increments of 1/8".
Margin
Margin
• If [DOWN] key is selected,
set the original(s) so that the
margin to be increased is set
to the rear side of the RSPF
or the document glass.
Two-sided copying
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Image shifted
down
Margin
3
Or
Margin
Margin
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key in the
special modes screen.
Adjust the shift width as needed and
touch the [OK] key.
1
2
3
The margin shift setting
screen will appear.
The margin shift icon
Use the
and
keys
OK
to set the shift width. The
shift amount can be set
from 0" to 1" in
CANCEL
OK
MARGIN SHIFT
SIDE 1
SIDE 2
(
, etc.) will also
(0 1)
inch
(0
1/2
inch
1/2
appear in the screen to
indicate that the function
is turned on.
increments of 1/8".
PAMPHLET COPY
Select the shift direction.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
4
Touch the [RIGHT],
[LEFT], or [DOWN] key.
The selected key will be
highlighted.
RIGHT
LEFT
DOWN
About the steps that follow
If you are using the document glass, see page 22.
If you are using the RSPF, see page 23.
• When margin shift is selected, rotation
copying will not function.
Note
• This feature cannot be used with paper that
is not a standard size.
• To cancel the margin shift function, touch
the [CANCEL] key in the margin shift
setting screen. (See the screen of step 3.)
41
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
ERASE COPY
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies that are produced when copying thick originals or
books. The erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is initially set to 1/2".
EDGE ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies
caused when heavy paper or a book is copied.
CENTER ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of
bound documents.
EDGE + CENTER ERASE
Eliminates both the shadow lines around the edges of
copies and the shadow at the center.
Touch the [ERASE] key in the special
modes screen.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
1
4
The erase setting screen
will appear.
The erase icon ( , etc.)
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
FT
ERASE
About the steps that follow
If the document glass is being used, see page 22.
will also appear in the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
JOB
BUILD
If the RSPF is being used, see page 23.
PY
MU
• This feature cannot be used with
non-standard size originals.
Note
Select the desired erase mode.
• This feature cannot be selected when
mixed feeding (p.25) is used.
• To cancel the erase copy function, touch the
[CANCEL] key in the erase setting screen.
(See the screen of step 3.)
2
Select one of the three
ERASE
erase modes. The
selected key will be
highlighted.
EDGE
ERASE
CENTER
ERASE
EDGE+CENTER
ERASE
Adjust the erase width as needed and
touch the [OK] key.
3
Use the
and
keys
CANCEL
EDGE
OK
to adjust the erase width.
The erase width can be
set from 0" to 1" in
(0 1)
inch
1/2
increments of 1/8".
42
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
DUAL PAGE COPY
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two adjoining pages on the document glass. It is
especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.
[Example] Copying the right and left pages of a book
• A reduction setting can be selected when using
Book original
Dual page copy
the dual page copy function, however, an
enlargement setting cannot be selected.
• The dual page copy function can only be used
when copying from the document glass. The
RSPF cannot be used.
• Only 8-1/2" x 11" paper can be used.
When copying book originals:
When copying a thick book, press down gently on the
book to flatten it against the document glass.
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in
the special modes screen.
1
2
3
The [DUAL PAGE
COPY] key is highlighted
to indicate that the
function is enabled, and
the dual page copy icon
3
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
MULTI SHOT
(
) will appear in the
screen.
Make sure that 8-1/2" x 11" size paper
4
is selected.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
If 8-1/2" x 11" size paper
is not selected, touch the
[PAPER SELECT] key to
select 8-1/2" x 11" paper.
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
You will return to the
main screen of copy
mode.
0
OK
100%
/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
5
Place the originals on the document
glass. (p.22)
ACC.#-C
Index
81/2x11
This page
is copied
first.
Center line of
original
• To cancel the dual page copy function,
touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in the
Note
special modes screen. (The key will no
longer be highlighted.) (See the screen of
step 1.)
• To erase shadows caused by the document
binding, use the edge erase function (p.42).
(Center Erase and Edge + Center Erase
cannot be used with the dual page copy
function.)
43
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
PAMPHLET COPY
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in the proper order for center-stapling and folding into a
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of the copy paper, such that a total of four pages are copied
onto each sheet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
[Example]: Copying 8 originals with pamphlet copy
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the
last page. The order of copying will be automatically
adjusted by the machine.
Originals (one-sided)
The finished copies
can be folded.
1
2
• Either left binding (opening from right to left) or right
binding (opening from left to right) can be selected.
3
4
5
6
7
• Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank
pages may be automatically added at the end,
depending on the number of the originals.
First page
8
Originals (two-sided)
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
First page
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key in
the special modes menu screen.
The pamphlet copy
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
1
4
MARGIN SHIFT
setting screen will
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
appear. The pamphlet
copy icon ( , etc.) will
also appear in the upper
left corner of the screen
to indicate that the
5
PAMPHLET COPY
Make sure that a suitable paper size
has been automatically selected.
6
If the desired copy paper
function is enabled.
size is not selected, use
the [PAPER SELECT] key
to select the paper size.
AUTO 11x17
PAPER SELECT
Specify whether 1-sided or 2-sided
originals will be copied.
2
After the paper size is
CANCEL
OK
selected, touch the [AUTO
IMAGE] key. A suitable
ratio will be automatically
selected.
PAMPHLET COPY
100%
ORIGINAL
1-SIDED 2-SIDED
LEFT
BINDING
RIGHT
BINDING
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
7
Select the binding position ([LEFT
BINDING] or [RIGHT BINDING]) and
then touch the [OK] key in the
pamphlet copy setting screen.
You will return to the
3
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
8
[When using the document glass:]
9
CANCEL
OK
special modes menu
screen.
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
LEFT
BINDING
RI
BINDING
D
When the pamphlet copy function is selected,
two-sided copying will be automatically enabled.
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch
the [CANCEL] key in the pamphlet copy
Note
setting screen. (See the screen of step 2.)
44
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
JOB BUILD MODE
Use this function when you need to copy more originals than can be placed in the RSPF at once. (The maximum
number of originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once is 100.)
• If the memory becomes full while scanning the originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO BEGIN
Note
COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear. To copy only the originals that have been scanned, press the
[START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Depending on the content of the originals, the memory may become full before 100 originals have been scanned. In
this case, press the [START] key ( ) to copy the originals that have been scanned, and then place the originals
that weren’t scanned in the RSPF once again and repeat the copy procedure.
•
• To increase the number of originals that can be scanned, install more memory or increase the memory
allocation in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Example: Copying 130 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" size originals)
Originals
page 1
page 101
100 sheets
30 sheets
3
* Divide the originals into sets so that each set is no more than
100 pages. Scan the sets in order beginning from the first
page of set A.
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key in the
special modes menu screen.
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
selected, select the number of copies
and any other desired copy settings,
and then press the [START] key ( ) .
1
4
The [JOB BUILD] key is
highlighted.
D
T
ERASE
The job build copy icon
Scanning begins. When
scanning of the first set
of originals (A in the
above example) is
(
) will also appear in
JOB
BUILD
Y
MUL
the screen to indicate
that the function is
enabled.
finished, insert the
ACC.#-C
second set and press the
[START] key ( ).
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
2
3
Repeat this step until all the remaining originals (B in
the above example) have been scanned.
Remove each scanned set of originals before inserting
the next set.
You will return to the
OK
main screen of copy
mode.
DUAL PAGE
COPY
ERASE
JOB
BUILD
MULTI SHOT
Touch the [READ-END] key.
5
Copying begins.
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
Place the original(s) in the RSPF.
(p.23)
READ-END
To cancel the job build mode function, touch
Note
the [JOB BUILD] key in the special modes
screen so that it is no longer highlighted.
(See the screen of step 1.)
45
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
MULTI SHOT COPY
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in a specified order.
Example: Copying four originals onto one sheet of paper
(Page number: 4 in 1 ( ), layout: ( ))
• When using the multi shot copy function, place the
originals, select the desired paper size, and select
the copy mode before selecting the multi shot copy
function in the special modes screen.
One-sided copy of
one-sided original
•
When using the multi shot copy function, the
appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based
on the original size, paper size, and the number of
originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum
reduction ratio is 25%. (The minimum ratio is 50% when
the RSPF is used.) Depending on the original size,
paper size, and the number of originals to be copied
onto one sheet, portions of original images may be cut
off.
Copy
One-sided copy of
two-sided original
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the
SPECIAL MODES menu screen.
The multi shot copy
Select a borderline setting.
1
2
4
Select [
].
], [ ], or
OK
CANCEL
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
[
setting screen will
LAYOUT
BORDER
appear. The multi shot
copy icon ( , etc.) will
also appear in the screen
to indicate that the
MULTI SHOT
function is enabled.
Touch the [OK] key in the multi shot
setting screen.
You will return to the special modes menu screen.
5
6
7
Select the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet in the multi
shot copy selection screen.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes menu screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
OK
CANCEL
MULTI SHOT
LAYOUT
BORDER
2in1
4in1
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
Select the layout.
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
3
8
9
Select the order in which
the originals will appear
on the copy.
OK
CANCEL
[When using the document glass:]
LAYOUT
BORDER
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key if necessary.
• The images may be rotated depending on
the number of originals and the orientation
of the originals and copy paper.
Note
• To cancel the multi shot copy function,
touch the [CANCEL] key in the multi shot
setting screen (the screen of step 2) .
46
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
ORIGINAL SIZE
If you wish to use the paper other than the automatically selected original size, original size setting is specified by
the special modes. The mix feeding setting (p.25) is also selected here.
Touch the
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key in the special
modes menu screen.
key and then touch the
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes menu screen.
You will return to the main screen of the copy
mode.
1
5
The original size setting
screen will appear.
AL MODES
To select mixed feeding, select the "MIX SIZE
ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE" checkbox.
Note
ORIGINAL
SIZE
COV
Mixed feeding is explained on page 25.
Touch the [MANUAL] key.
2
GINAL SIZE
AUTO
MANUAL
3
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MOD
Select the original size.
3
ORIGINAL SIZE
OK
OK
AUTO
MANUAL
8½x11R
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
11x17
8½x13
AB
INCH
[MANUAL] key is highlighted and the selected paper
size is displayed.
To select an AB size original, touch the
Note
[AB
INCH] key. AB sizes will appear.
Touch the inside [OK] key.
4
You will return to the special modes menu
screen.
47
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
COVER COPY
Cover copy mode is used to add a cover to the front or back, or both the front and back, of a multipage document.
To use cover copy mode, the RSPF must be used.
Copying onto a cover
Not copying onto a cover
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(copying onto a cover)
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(not copying onto a cover)
4
3
4
2
1
3
4
4
3
2
1
3
2
Back cover
2
Back cover
(no copying)
1
1
SHARP
SHARP
Cover original
Front cover
(can copy onto front side)
Two-sided originals
Front cover
(not copying onto a cover)
3
1
Two-sided originals
5
4
2
4
3
2
Back cover
(no copying)
1
SHARP
SHARP
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
Cover original
Front cover
(can copy onto front side)
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(not copying onto a cover)
4
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
3
2
1
One-sided originals
Two-sided copies
(copying onto a cover)
4
3
Back cover
3
2
1
1
Back cover
(no copying)
Two-sided originals
SHARP
3
1
3
1
Cover original
Front cover
Two-sided originals
SHARP
3
1
Front cover
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a
back cover can be selected.
(can copy onto front side)
(Back side of cover is blank.)
SHARP
Cover original
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a
back cover can be selected.
• You can specify whether or not the front cover is
copied on.
• Copying is not possible on either side of a back
cover.
48
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Touch the
[COVER] key in the special modes
menu screen.
key and then touch the
Load the cover paper to be used into
the bypass tray.
1
6
Load the same size of
paper as the paper to
be used for the copy
job.
The cover setting screen
will appear.
The cover icon ( , etc.)
will also appear in the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
L
COVER
OT
About the steps that follow
See page 23.
Select the cover(s) that you wish to
add.
2
OK
SPECIAL MODES
COVER
FRONT
• It is not possible to copy on the inside of a
front cover, nor on either side of a back
cover.
• Be sure to place the originals in the RSPF.
The document glass cannot be used for this
function.
Note
CANCEL
OK
BACK
FRONT+BACK
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?
NO
YES
• During cover copying, stream feeding mode
will not function even if enabled in the key
operator programs. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
• To cancel the cover copy function, select
the cover copy function again and touch the
[CANCEL] key. (See the screen of step 2.)
3
To add only a front cover, touch the [FRONT] key. To
add only a back cover, touch the [BACK] key. To add
both a front and back cover, touch the
[FRONT+BACK] key.
Specify whether or not the front cover
3
is to be copied on.
CANCEL
OK
Select [YES] or [NO] in
the touch panel. If
[YES] is selected, the
first page of the
CK
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?
NO
YES
document will be
copied onto the front
cover sheet.
Touch the [OK] key in the cover
setting screen.
Return to the special modes screen.
4
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
5
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
49
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
B/W REVERSE COPY
The B/W REVERSE feature is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.
original
B/W reverse copy
When the B/W reverse function is selected, the
exposure mode will be automatically set to TEXT
mode. Other exposure modes cannot be selected. If
B/W reverse is canceled, TEXT mode will not
automatically be canceled.
Touch the
[B/W REVERSE] key in the special
modes menu screen.
key and then touch the
1
The [B/W REVERSE]
key is highlighted.
The B/W reverse icon
B/W
REVERSE
OVER
(
) will also appear in
the screen to indicate
that the function is
enabled.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
About the steps that follow
If the document glass is being used, see page 22.
If the RSPF is being used, see page 23.
To cancel the B/W reverse copy function,
Note
touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the special
modes screen. (The key will no longer be
highlighted.) (See the screen of step 1.)
50
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
CARD SHOT
The front and back of a card can be copied onto one sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for certification purposes and helps save paper.
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this
function.
Original
CARD
Copy
CARD
Front of
card
CARD
Back of
card
Example:
Portrait
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size
Example:
Landscape
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size
3
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
selected, or select another size using
the [PAPER SELECT] key.
Enter the X dimension (width) and Y
dimension (length) of the original card
1
2
3
with the
keys.
EXPOSURE
CANCEL
OK
SIZE RESET
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
FIT TO
PAGE
100%
• X (width) is initially selected. Enter X dimension
and then touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y
dimension.
• To change the X or Y value back to the default
value, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. The default
values can be changed in the key operator
programs. (See "CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on
page 5 of this manual.)
• To have the images enlarged or reduced by a
suitable ratio based on the entered original size
so that the front and back sides fit into the
selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]
key.
Touch the
key and then touch the
[CARD SHOT] key in the special
modes screen.
The CARD SHOT setting
ORIGINAL
SIZE
COVER
screen will appear. A
card shot icon ( ) will
also appear in the upper
left corner of the screen
to indicate that the
CARD SHOT
function is turned on.
Touch the outer [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
OK
main screen of copy
mode.
CANCEL
SIZE RESET
FIT TO
PAGE
51
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Place the original on the document
glass.
5
Place the front side of the
original face down and
close the document
cover/RSPF.
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
6
The front side of the card
is scanned.
ACC.#-C
Place the back side of the original
face down on the document glass.
7
Press the [START] key ( ).
8
The back side of the card
is scanned and copying
begins.
• The original must be placed on the
document glass. The RSPF cannot be
used.
Note
• Even when [FIT TO PAGE] is selected,
you can touch the [COPY RATIO] key in
the main screen of copy mode to manually
select the ratio.
• To cancel the card shot function, touch the
[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting
screen (the screen of step 4).
52
Chapter 4
USER SETTINGS
4
CUSTOM SETTINGS
The custom settings let you adjust certain features of the machine to better suit your needs. The custom settings
include the following settings:
●TOTAL COUNT...........................This displays the number of pages output by the machine. (p.55)
●DISPLAY CONTRAST ................This is used to adjust the contrast of the touch panel. (p.55)
1
●LIST PRINT* ..............................This is used to print a setting list or a font list. (p.55)
●CLOCK........................................This is used to set the date and time of the machine’s built-in clock. (p.55)
●TRAY SETTINGS........................This is used to configure the paper type and paper size settings for each
tray, and select whether or not automatic switch over to another tray with the
same size and type of paper will take place if the paper runs out during
continuous printing. (p.55)
The following settings are explained in detail in the operation manual for facsimile.
2
●ADDRESS CONTROL* .............If your machine has the fax option, this setting is used to store fax numbers
for automatic dialing. Group keys and user indexes can also be
programmed.
●RECEIVE MODE* ......................This is used to select the fax receive mode (automatic or manual).
2
2
●FAX DATA FORWARD* ............This is used to forward faxes received in memory to another destination.
3
●KEYBOARD SELECT* ...............When using the fax or network scanner function, use this setting to change the
layout of the keyboard in the letter entry screen. (p.55)
●KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS..Settings for key operators (administrators of this machine). A key appears for
these settings in the custom settings menu screen. For explanations of the
settings, see the Key operator’s guide. (For explanations of key operator
programs for the fax option, see the operation manual for facsimile.)
1
* The fax option or network printer function must be installed.
2
* The fax option must be installed.
3
* The fax option or network scanner function must be installed.
53
USER SETTINGS
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CUSTOM SETTINGS
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [OK] key in the setting
screen to close it.
1
3
LINE
DATA
When you are ready to exit the custom
settings, touch the [EXIT] key.
4
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
TOTAL COUNT
LIST PRINT
CLOCK
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
TRAY SETTINGS
RECEIVE MODE
KEYBOARD
SELECT
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Touch the key of the desired setting.
The setting screen will appear.
2
Each of the custom settings is explained on the
following pages.
The [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected in the
following example.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
TOTAL COUNT
LIST PRINT
CLOCK
FAX DATA
FORWARD
ADDRESS
CONTROL
TRAY SETTINGS
RECEIVE MODE
KEY
SE
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
When the [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected, the
following screen appears.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
TRAY SETTINGS
TYPE / SIZE
COPY
PRINT
FAX
1/3
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / 8½x11
PLAIN / 8½x14
PLAIN / 11x17
• When a checkbox appears next to an item
Note
in a screen, touch the checkbox (
select the item. A checkmark (
appear to indicate that the item is
selected.
) to
) will
In the above settings, tray 1 can be used
for printer, copy, and fax mode. Tray 2 and
tray 3 can only be used for copy mode.
• For a detailed explanation of the trays, see
"CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE
AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS" (p.19).
54
USER SETTINGS
SETTINGS
Total count
Keyboard select
The total page count display shows the following
counts:
When using the fax or network scanner function, you
can change the layout of the keyboard that appears in
the letter entry screen. Select the layout that you find
easiest to use.
• The total count shows the combined output total of
the copy, fax, and printer functions.
• Total number of copies and printed pages
• Number of pages fed through the RSPF
• Number of two-sided copies
The following three keyboard configurations are
available:
• Number of times the stapler was used
• Number of pages sent using the network scanner
function
• Number of sent and received fax pages
The counts that appear will vary depending on the
peripheral equipment installed.
• Keyboard 1 (QWERTY configuration)*
• Keyboard 2 (AZERTY configuration)
• Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF configuration)
*The default setting is "Keyboard 1".
(Example: Letter entry screen when Keyboard 3 is
selected.)
• Each sheet of paper that is 11" x 17" (A3) size is
counted as two sheets.
NAME
CANCEL
OK
• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided
copying is counted as two sheets (11" x 17" (A3)
paper is counted as four sheets.).
a
k
t
b
l
u
c
m
v
d
n
w
e
o
x
f
p
y
g
q
z
h
r
i
s
j
@
ABC
abc
Display contrast
AB/ab
12#$
ÀÄÂ/àäâ
SPACE
Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the touch
panel easier to view under various lighting conditions.
Touch the [LIGHTER] key to make the screen lighter,
or the [DARKER] key to make the screen darker.
4
List print
Use this to print the PRINTER TEST PAGE, the FAX
REPORT, or the SENDING ADDRESS LIST.
Clock
Use this to set the date and time of the machine’s
built-in clock. The date and time are used for functions
that require date and time information.
Tray settings
The paper type, paper size, and enabled modes can
be set for each tray. Auto tray switching and disabling
of two-sided printing on letterhead paper can also be
set. See page 19 and 20 for details on setting the
paper type and paper size.
• To select which trays can be used in each of copy,
printer, and fax modes, select the checkboxes (
of the desired trays in each mode.
)
• When a tray runs out of paper in the middle of a job,
the auto tray switching function automatically
switches the paper source to another tray that has
the same paper size and paper type settings. (The
auto tray switching function cannot be set for the
bypass tray.)
55
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY
If you frequently use the same settings for copy jobs, you can store in the settings in a job program. Up to 10 job
programs can be stored, and the programs are retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently
used copy settings in a program, you can eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a
copy job.
● After a job program is stored, if any settings of the key operator programs related to the stored job program are
prohibited, the related settings in the job program will not be recalled.
● If the overwriting of job programs is prohibited in the key operator programs, it will not be possible to overwrite or
delete a job program.
● To exit job program memory mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT]
key on the touch panel.
STORING A JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Select the copy settings that you wish
to store in the program.
1
2
4
The number of copies
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS
[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].
cannot be stored.
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
S
8½x11
8½x14
ACC.#-C
OUTPUT
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
5
The selected settings will
be stored under the
program number
D PRESS
EL].
CANCEL
OK
NUMBER.
AU
EXPOS
selected in step 3.
AUTO
8½x11
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
ECALL
STORE/DELETE
COPY RATIO
Touch a program number from 1 to 10
in the storage register screen.
3
ROGRAMS
SS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
STORE
If a numeric key is selected that has already
been programmed, a confirmation screen
will appear. To replace the existing program
with the new program, touch the [STORE]
key and continue from step 4. If you do not
wish to replace the existing program, touch
the [CANCEL] key to return to the above
screen and select a different numeric key.
Note
56
USER SETTINGS
EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Place the original, check the original
size, and then set the number of
copies and any other desired copy
settings not stored in the program.
When finished, press the [START] key
( ).
1
3
S
ACC.#-C
ACC.#-C
Touch the program number key of the
desired program.
2
The job program will be
JOB PROGRAMS
executed. A number for
which no job program
has been stored cannot
be selected.
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
4
DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Select the program number of the
program to be deleted.
1
3
If a number key for which
EXIT
no job program has been
stored is selected, the
proceed to step 4 on the
previous page (for
S
ACC.#-C
STORE/DELETE
storing a job program).
Touch the [DELETE] key.
4
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
2
The selected program will
be deleted and you will
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED.
STORE ANOTHER PROGRAM?
return to the screen of step
3. If the [CANCEL] key is
touched, you will return to
the screen of step 3
without deleting the
program.
NUMBER.
CANCEL
RECALL
DELETE
STORE
STORE/DELET
ECALL
STORE/DELETE
If you are finished deleting programs, touch the [EXIT]
key in the screen of step 3 to exit.
57
AUDITING MODE
When auditing mode is enabled, a count is kept of the number of pages printed or copied by each account
(maximum of 100 accounts). The counts can be viewed whenever necessary.
• Auditing mode can be enabled for all modes (copy mode, fax mode, network scanner mode, and printer mode)
Note
in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
• To print in printer mode when auditing mode is enabled, enter your account number in the printer driver setup
screen on your computer.
COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS ENABLED
When auditing mode is enabled, the following account number entry screen appears.
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.
-----
Enter your account number (5 digits)
with the numeric keys.
When the copy job is finished, press
the [ACC.#-C] key ( ).
1
2
Each digit is indicated by
an asterisk " ".
The screen reverts to the
ON LINE
DATA
account number entry
screen.
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
S
AC-C
S
ACC.#-C
• To perform an interrupt job when auditing
mode is enabled, press the [INTERRUPT]
key ( ) . The account number entry
screen will appear. Enter your account
number. When the interrupt job is finished,
be sure to press the [INTERRUPT] key
READY TO COPY.
0
Note
ORIGINAL
8½x11
AUTO
SPECIAL M
EXPOSURE
ACCOUNT STATUS: COPIES MADE 000,000
COPIES REMAINING 999,999
UTO
8½x11
2-SIDED
APER SELECT
100%
OUTPU
(
) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to end
COPY RATIO
interrupt mode.
• If an invalid account number is entered in
step 1, the account number entry screen
reappears.
• When a valid account number is entered, the
number of copies already made by that account
appears for several seconds on the initial screen.
• If a limit has been set in the key operator programs
for the number of copies that can be made by the
account, the remaining number that can be made is
displayed in the message display together with the
number of copies already made. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
•
When ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY in
the key operator programs is enabled (See
the "Key operator’s guide".) , the following
message will appear and operation will not
be permitted for 1 minute if an invalid
account number is entered 3 times in a
row.
PLEASE SEE YOUR KEY OPERATOR FOR
ASSISTANCE.
58
Chapter 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
5
This chapter describes troubleshooting and maintenance such as misfeed removal, replacing the toner cartridge and
cleaning the machine.
DISPLAY MESSAGES.................................................................................................................... 60
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................... 62
Trouble
Page
Problems related to machine operation
The machine does not operate.
The power is on but copying is not possible.
Two-sided copying is not possible.
62
Wrong paper size is displayed for paper in the bypass tray.
A copy job stops before it is finished.
The contrast of the touch panel is too high or too low.
Image cannot be rotated.
Original size is not selected automatically, or copying does not take place on paper that matches the original size.
Paper size for a paper tray cannot be set.
Order of copies is incorrect.
The job is canceled after the originals were being scanned.
Not all pages are copied.
63
64
The RSPF cannot be used.
Lighting fixture flickers.
Paper feeding problems
When using paper fed from the bypass tray, the copied image is skewed.
Paper from the bypass tray misfeeds.
Paper misfeeds.
Image quality problems
Copies are too dark or too light.
Text is not clear in a copy.
Part of the copied image is cut off.
65
Blank copies.
Paper is wrinkled or the copied image comes off when the paper surface is rubbed.
Copies are smudged or dirty.
White or black lines appear copies.
MISFEED REMOVAL...................................................................................................................... 66
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ....................................................................................... 74
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT........................................................................................ 75
STAPLE JAM REMOVAL .............................................................................................................................................. 76
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND TOTAL COUNT......................................................... 76
CLEANING THE MACHINE............................................................................................................ 77
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF................................................................................................................................. 77
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER............................................................................................................... 77
59
DISPLAY MESSAGES
If one of the following messages appears in the display, take prompt action as instructed by the message.
Message
Cause and solution
Page
58
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT
NUMBER.
Auditing mode is enabled. Enter your account number.
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
Remove the misfeed as explained in "MISFEED REMOVAL".
66
2-SIDED COPIES CANNOT BE
MADE ON THIS PAPER TYPE.
This appears when you attempt to make two-sided copies on special
paper that cannot be used for two-sided copying. Cancel two-sided
copying or change the paper.
15, 27
REMOVE PAPER FROM THE
<*>TRAY.
The indicated output tray is full. Remove the output from the tray.
(<*> indicates the tray that is full.)
-
-
CLOSE THE <**> COVER.
The indicated cover is open. Close the cover. (<**> indicates the
cover that is open.)
PLEASE EXTEND BYPASS-TRAY.
When copying from the bypass tray, be sure to pull out the bypass
tray extension.
18
COVER SHEETS MUST BE THE
SAME SIZE AS THE COPY
PAPER USED.
When adding a cover, load paper in the bypass tray that is the
same size as the paper in the tray selected for copying.
48
TONER SUPPLY IS LOW.
The toner cartridge must be replaced soon.
74
74
74
CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE.
CHECK THE TONER CARTRIDGE.
The toner cartridge is out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge.
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly.
THE DOCUMENT FEEDER IS
DISABLED.
The RSPF has been disabled in the key operator programs. Use
the document glass.
22
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS
PROHIBITED. PLEASE SELECT
ANOTHER PAPER TRAY.
This appears when a tray is selected that has been prohibited in
"TRAY SETTINGS" in the custom settings.
55
PLEASE CHECK THE PAPER
SIZE OF TRAY <***>.
The tray's paper size setting is different from the actual paper size.
Load the correct size of paper. The tray is indicated in <***>.
15
75
72
ADD STAPLES.
The finisher is out of staples. Replace the staple cartridge as
explained in "STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT".
PLEASE REMOVE PAPER FROM Paper remains in the stapler compiler. Remove the paper.
THE STAPLER COMPILER.
MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] The memory becomes full while scanning originals. Press the
TO BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO
CANCEL.
[START] key ( ) to copy only the originals that have been
scanned, or press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to cancel the job.
-
60
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Message
Cause and solution
Page
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS OUT
OF SERVICE.
Contact your SHARP service center.
-
CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR
STAPLE JAM.
Staples are jammed in the finisher or the staple case is not
attached correctly. Check the staple case. If the message still
appears after removing the jammed staples, disable the stapler
using "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator programs
(See the "Key operator’s guide.), and contact your SHARP service
center.
76
(CALL FOR SERVICE SOON.)
(MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.)
It will soon be time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP
service center.
-
-
It is time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP service
center.
CALL FOR SERVICE.
CODE:
Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If this does not clear
the message, write down the 2-digit main code and 2-digit
sub-code and promptly contact your SHARP service center.
-
-
PLEASE CHECK THE ORIGINAL
SIZE. JOB IS CANCELED.
The original in the RSPF is longer than the size that was detected.
Reinsert the original, make sure that the size indicated in the
touch panel is the same as the actual size, and begin copying. You
can also select mixed feeding to copy onto paper that matches
each original size after all originals have been scanned.
5
61
TROUBLESHOOTING
If you experience difficulty using the machine, check the following troubleshooting guide before calling for service.
Many problems can be easily resolved by the user. If you are unable to solve the problem using the troubleshooting
guide, turn off the power switch, unplug the machine, and contact your SHARP service center. The following
problems are related to the general operation of the machine and copying.
For problems related to the printer, fax, and network scanner functions, see the corresponding operation manuals.
Problems related to machine operation
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
Power switch OFF.
→ Turn the power switch ON.
13
The machine is warming up.
→ The machine requires about 23 seconds to warm up after the
power switch is turned on. While the machine is warming up,
copy settings can be selected but copying is not possible. Wait
until "READY TO COPY." appears.
13
The machine does not operate.
Out of paper.
→ Load paper.
17
74
66
Out of toner.
→ Replace the toner cartridge.
Misfeed occurs.
→ Remove the misfed paper.
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
→ If only the [START] key ( ) blinks, auto power shut-off mode
has activated. Press the [START] key ( ) to return the machine
to normal operation.
14
10
27
The power is on but copying is not
possible.
Copy mode is not selected.
→ Press the [COPY] key to select copy mode.
Automatic two-sided copying was attempted on paper
that is not suitable for automatic two-sided copying.
→ Two-sided copying is not possible on special paper. Use paper
that is suitable for automatic two-sided copying.
Two-sided copying is not possible.
Two-sided copying is prohibited in the key operator
programs.
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit
two-sided copying.
Key
operator’s
guide
The bypass tray extension is not pulled out.
→ To detect the paper size correctly, the bypass tray extension
must be pulled out when the paper is loaded.
Wrong paper size is displayed for
paper in the bypass tray.
18
-
Too many pages have accumulated in the output tray,
causing the tray full sensor to activate. Further
copying is not possible until the pages are removed.
→ Remove the pages from the output tray.
A copy job stops before it is
finished.
The display contrast has not been adjusted.
→ Adjust the contrast using "DISPLAY CONTRAST" in the custom
settings.
The contrast of the touch panel is
too high or too low.
55
Neither auto paper selection nor auto image mode are
selected.
→ Rotation copy functions only if auto paper select mode or auto
image mode is selected.
25, 30
Image cannot be rotated.
Rotation copy is prohibited in the key operator
programs.
Key
operator’s
guide
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit
rotation copying.
62
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The RSPF was not opened completely when the
original was placed on the document glass.
→ Open the RSPF completely, place the original on the document
glass, and close the RSPF.
-
The original contains large black solid areas.
→ If the original contains any large black solid areas, the original
size may not be detected automatically. Use the [SPECIAL
MODES] key to select the original size.
47
22
Original size is not selected
automatically, or copying does not
take place on paper that matches
the original size.
The original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size.
→ When the original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size, the size
cannot be detected. Use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the
desired paper size.
The original is not a standard size.
→ When the original is not a standard size, the size cannot be
detected. Manually select the closest standard original size, or
use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the desired paper size.
22, 47
-
A copy, print job, or received fax is being printed.
→ Set the correct paper size after printing is finished.
Operation has temporarily stopped because the tray is
out of paper or a misfeed occurred.
→ Load paper or remove the misfeed, finish the copy job, and then
set the paper size.
19, 66
Paper size for a paper tray cannot
be set.
During an interrupt copy job.
→ Set the correct paper size after the interrupt copy job is finished.
34
66
Misfeed occurs.
→ Remove the misfed paper.
Paper tray settings are prohibited in the key operator
programs.
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit paper
Key
operator’s
guide
5
tray settings.
The originals were placed in the wrong order.
→ When using the document glass, scan the originals one sheet at
a time beginning from the first page. When using the RSPF, insert
the originals with the first page on top and facing up.
Order of copies is incorrect.
23
The memory become full while the originals were
being scanned.
→ When using a function such as pamphlet copy or multi shot copy
where all original pages are scanned into memory before copying
begins, scanning will stop and copying will not take place if the
memory becomes full. The number of pages that can be scanned
into memory can be increased by installing more memory.
The job is canceled after the
originals were being scanned.
78
The memory become full while the originals were
being scanned.
→ When the memory becomes full while the originals are being
scanned, you can select whether you want to continue the job
and print only those originals that were scanned, or cancel the
job. If you continue the job, copies will only be made of the
originals that were scanned, and thus all originals cannot be
copied at once.
Not all pages are copied.
-
Key
operator’s
guide
Use of the RSPF has been prohibited in the key
operator programs.
→ Enable use of the RSPF in the key operator programs.
The RSPF cannot be used.
Lighting fixture flickers.
The same power outlet is used for the lighting fixture
and the machine.
→ Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other
electric appliances.
4
63
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Paper feeding problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray
exceeds the maximum number.
→ Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.
15
When using paper fed from the
bypass tray, the copied image is
skewed.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the
loaded paper.
→ Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.
18
20
15
18
15
The paper type setting is not correct.
→ When using a special paper, be sure to set the correct paper
type.
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray
exceeds the maximum number.
→ Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.
Paper from the bypass tray
misfeeds.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the
loaded paper.
→ Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight
range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified range.
Paper is curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or crimped paper. Replace with dry copy paper.
During periods when the machine is not used for a long time,
remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a
bag to prevent moisture absorption.
81
Paper misfeeds.
Paper is not loaded properly.
→ Make sure the paper is properly loaded.
17
66
17
Pieces of paper remain inside machine.
→ Remove all pieces of misfed paper.
Sheets of paper stick together.
→ Fan the paper well before loading it.
64
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Image quality problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The image of the original is too light or too dark.
→ Select the correct original image type in the exposure setting and
adjust the copying exposure.
29
The copying exposure is set to "AUTO".
Key
operator’s
guide
→ The "EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT" key operator program can be
used to adjust the exposure level used for "AUTO" exposure.
Consult the administrator of the machine.
Copies are too dark or too light.
The original type that is most suitable for the original
has not been selected in the copy exposure setting
screen.
29
→ Change the original type selection to "AUTO", or manually select
the most suitable original type setting.
The correct original type has not been selected in the
copy exposure setting screen.
→ Change the original type setting to "TEXT".
Text is not clear in a copy.
29
22, 23
30
The original was placed in the wrong position.
→ Place the original in the correct position. When using the
document glass, place the original against the far left side.
A suitable ratio for the original size and paper size has
not been selected.
→ Use auto ratio selection to obtain the correct ratio for the copy.
Part of the copied image is cut off.
The tray’s paper size setting was not changed when a
different size of paper was loaded in the tray.
→ Be sure to change the tray’s paper size setting when loading a
different size of paper in the tray.
19
47
An AB paper size is being used.
→ When using copy paper that is an AB size, set the original size
manually.
5
The original is not placed face up in the RSPF or face
down on the document glass.
→ Place the original face up in the RSPF or face down on the
document glass.
Blank copies.
22, 23
15
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight
range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified range.
The paper type setting is not correct.
→ Set the correct paper type. To set the paper type for a tray, see
"CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS".
Paper is wrinkled or the copied
image comes off when the paper
surface is rubbed.
19, 20
Paper is curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or wrinkled paper. Replace with dry copy
paper. During periods when the machine is not used for a long
time, remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place
in a bag to prevent moisture absorption.
81
77
The document glass or the underside of the RSPF is
dirty.
→ Clean regularly.
Copies are smudged or dirty.
The original is smudged or blotchy.
→ Use a clean original.
-
The scanner glass for the RSPF is dirty.
→ Clean the long, narrow scanning glass.
White or black lines appear copies.
77
65
MISFEED REMOVAL
When a misfeed occurs during copying, the message "MISFEED HAS OCCURRED." will appear in the touch panel
and printing will stop.
● If the misfed paper tears during removal, remove the torn pieces. Take care not to touch the photoconductive
drum while removing the pieces. Nicks and scratches on the drum will cause dirty copies.
First, locate the misfeed
1
Misfeed in the RSPF (p.67)
Misfeed in the finisher (p.72)
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Misfeed in the machine (p.68)
Misfeed in the bypass tray (p.68)
Misfeed in the upper paper tray (p.70)
Misfeed in the lower paper tray (p.71)
3
4
5
6
INFORMATION
If the fax option is installed, all received faxes are stored in memory. The faxes are automatically printed after the
misfeed is removed.
Note
MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a
misfeed has occurred.
INFORMATION
66
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE RSPF
Section C
Remove the misfed original.
1
Carefully remove the
misfed original from the
exit area.
Check sections A, B, and
C in the illustration at left
A
and remove the misfed
original.
B
C
If the misfed original cannot be easily removed from
the exit area, open the moveable part of the document
feeder tray and remove the reversing tray, and then
remove the original.
Section A
Open the document
feeder cover and
Document feeder cover
Reversing tray
Moveable
part
carefully remove the
misfed original from the
document feeder tray.
Close the document
feeder cover.
Section B
Open the RSPF and
rotate the release roller in
the direction of the arrow
to feed the original out.
Close the RSPF and then
carefully remove the
Roller
After removing a misfed original from the
exit area, be sure to attach the reversing tray
securely to the exit area (When the RSPF is
installed.).
original.
Note
5
If the misfed original
cannot be removed,
open the document
transport cover (below),
and rotate the release
roller again.
Open and close the RSPF to clear the
misfeed message from the touch
panel.
2
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the
document feeder cover
or the document
If a small original (5-1/2" x 8-1/2", etc.) is misfed, or if
an original misfeed occurs in the reversing tray of the
RSPF, lift the document transport cover knob, open the
document transport cover, and remove the original.
transport cover.
Document
transport cover
After the misfeed is removed and the misfeed
message is cleared, a message will appear indicating
the number of originals that must be reinserted in the
RSPF.
Document transport
cover knob
Reinsert the originals that still must
3
be scanned (Including the original that
was being scanned when the misfeed
occurred.), and press the [START]
key( ).
Copying of the remaining originals will resume.
67
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY
Carefully pull the misfed paper out.
Open and close the side cover.
1
2
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the front
cover.
If the message is not
cleared, see "A. Misfeed
in the paper feed area".
MISFEED IN THE MACHINE
Determine the location of the misfeed and remove it appropriately as indicated below.
If paper is misfed, go to
"B. Misfeed in the fusing
area" (p.67).
If paper is misfed here, go to
"A. Misfeed in the paper feed
area" (below).
A. Misfeed in the paper feed area
Open the bypass tray and the side
cover.
Carefully remove the misfed paper.
Turn the roller rotating knob in the
direction of the arrow to assist in
removing it.
1
3
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Roller rotating knob
Press gently on both sides of the front
cover and pull it open.
2
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
Warning
Caution
Do not touch the photoconductive drum
(green portion) when removing the misfed
paper. Doing so may damage the drum and
cause smudges on copies.
68
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Close the front cover and side cover.
4
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
B: Misfeed in the fusing area
Open the bypass tray and the side
cover.
If you were unable to remove the
misfeed in step 4, press down on the
fusing unit paper guide knob to open
the paper guide, and carefully remove
the misfed paper.
1
5
Press and pull it open gently on both
sides of the front cover.
2
• Do not touch the photoconductive drum
Caution
(green portion) when removing the misfed
paper. Doing so may damage the drum
and cause smudges on copies.
5
• Take care not to let unfixed toner on the
misfed paper soil your hands or clothes.
Turn the roller rotating knob in the
direction of the arrow.
3
Close the fusing unit paper guide and
press down on the fusing unit release
levers.
6
7
Roller rotating knob
Close the front cover and side cover.
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
Lift the fusing unit release levers and
4
carefully remove the misfed paper.
Fusing unit release levers
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
Warning
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
69
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY
Remove the paper by pulling it into the center tray.
MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY
Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.68)
Lift and pull out the upper paper tray
and then remove the misfed paper.
1
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Replace the upper paper tray.
2
Push the upper paper
tray in completely.
Open and close the side cover.
3
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the front
cover.
70
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY
● Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.68)
●
Use the following procedure to remove misfeeds that occur in the 500-sheet paper feed unit or 2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit.
Open the lower side cover.
1
Remove the misfed paper.
2
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
If the misfed paper is not visible in
step 2, lift and pull out the lower paper
tray and remove the misfed paper.
3
5
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Replace the lower paper tray.
Push the lower paper tray in completely.
Close the lower side cover.
4
5
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
71
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA
(
when a job separator tray kit or finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed)
If a job separator tray kit or a finisher is installed, a misfeed may occur in the upper exit area.
Open the upper right side cover.
Close the upper right side cover.
1
3
Make sure that the misfeed message is cleared.
Gently pull the misfed paper out.
2
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY
(when a finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed)
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
INFORMATION
Grasp the handle of the stapler
compiler cover and pull to open the
cover.
Remove any misfed paper from the
transport area.
1
2
72
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
If staple sort copying is being
performed, open the paper guide and
remove any misfed paper from the
stapler compiler.
3
Close the stapler compiler cover.
4
5
6
If the offset tray is being used, remove
any misfed paper from the offset tray.
5
If the top tray is being used, open the
top cover, remove any misfed paper,
and close the top cover.
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
73
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
To check how much toner remains in the toner cartridge (p.76), hold down the [COPY] key. The amount of toner
remaining will appear in the display. When less than 25% of the toner remains, obtain a new toner cartridge as soon
as possible. When "TONER SUPPLY IS LOW." appears in the display, be sure to have a new cartridge on hand for
replacement at any time as little toner remains. When "CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE." appears in the touch
panel, the toner cartridge must be replaced. Follow these steps to replace the cartridge.
When running long copy jobs or copying originals with many areas of solid black, "TONER REPLENISHMENT IN
Note
PROGRESS." may appear in the touch panel and copying may stop even though the cartridge still has toner.
When this occurs, the toner is being replenished. Replenishment will last about two minutes. When the [START]
key ( ) illuminates, press the [START] key ( ) to resume copying.
Press gently on both sides of the front
cover and pull it open.
While pushing the lock release lever,
gently insert the toner cartridge along
the guides until it clicks into place.
1
2
4
Pull the toner cartridge out while
pressing the lock release lever.
When pulling out the
Toner cartridge
lock release lever
toner cartridge, place
your other hand on the
green part of the
cartridge.
Handle
If dirt or dust adheres to the toner cartridge,
remove it before installing the cartridge.
Note
• After removing the toner cartridge, do not
shake it or tap it. Doing so may cause
toner to leak from the cartridge. Put the
old cartridge immediately in the bag
provided with the new cartridge.
Note
Remove the tape from the shutter. Pull
the shutter out of the toner cartridge
as shown in the illustration.
Discard the shutter.
5
6
• Dispose of the old toner cartridge in
accordance with local regulations.
Remove the new toner cartridge from
the bag. Grasp both ends of the
cartridge and shake it horizontally
about 20 times. After shaking the
cartridge, remove the tape.
3
Grasp the hand grip to
hold the cartridge. Do not
hold the cartridge by the
About 20 times
Close the front cover.
Shutter
shutter. Be sure to only
shake the cartridge
before the tape is
removed.
Tape
74
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
(when the finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed)
When the message "ADD STAPLES." appears, replace the staple cartridge as follows:
Open the stapler cover.
Remove the tape from the cartridge.
1
5
6
7
Grasp the green portion of the staple
box and remove the staple box from
the stapler.
Insert the staple box into the stapler
unit until it clicks into place.
2
Close the stapler cover.
Remove the staple cartridge from
inside the staple box.
3
4
5
Insert the new staple cartridge into the
box until it clicks into place.
Insert the new cartridge
by aligning the arrows on
the cartridge with those
on the box.
Check that the cartridge
has locked into place by
pulling it slightly.
75
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
STAPLE JAM REMOVAL
If staples become jammed in the stapler, the message "CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR STAPLE JAM." will appear.
Follow these steps to remove the jammed staples.
Open the stapler cover.
Return the lever to its original
position.
1
4
5
6
Grasp the green portion of the staple
box and remove the staple box from
the stapler.
Insert the staple box into the stapler
unit until it clicks into place.
2
Close the stapler cover.
Raise the lever at the end of the staple
box and remove the jammed staples.
3
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY
AND TOTAL COUNT
The approximate quantity of toner remaining and the total count can be displayed as explained below.
● The total count shows the combined output total of the copy, fax, and printer functions.
Checking the total count and toner quantity
Hold down the [COPY] key. The total count and toner quantity appear while the key is held down.
TOTAL COUNT : 0,123,456
TONER QUANTITY : 100-75%
SPECIAL MODES
COPY
2-SIDED COPY
8½x11
8½x14
OUTPUT
• Each 11" x 17" (A3) page is counted as two pages. Two sided pages are also counted as two pages.
• The amount of toner consumed will vary depending on conditions of usage and the type of originals copied.
Note
The toner quantity display should only be used as an approximate guide.
76
CLEANING THE MACHINE
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF
If the document glass, RSPF, or scanning glass for originals fed from the RSPF (the long narrow glass surface on
the right side of the document glass) become dirty, the dirt may appear on copies. Always keep these parts clean.
Stains or dirt on the document glass/RSPF will also be copied. Wipe the document glass, the RSPF and the
scanning window on the document glass with a soft, clean cloth.
If necessary, dampen the cloth with water. Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.
Do not spray flammable cleaner gas. Gas from the spray may come in contact with the internal
electrical components or high-temperature parts of the fusing unit, creating a risk of fire or
Warning
electrical shock.
Surface of document glass
Underside of RSPF
Scanning glass for RSPF
Scanning glass
5
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER
If misfeeds occur frequently when feeding envelopes or other thick paper from the bypass tray, wipe the paper feed
roller at the feed slot of the bypass tray with a soft, clean cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
Bypass tray paper feed roller
77
Chapter 6
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
6
Optional equipments and supplies are explained in this chapter. To purchase optional equipment and supplies
contact your SHARP service center.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
FINISHER (AR-FN5A) See page 79.
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D30) See page 80.
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D31) See page 80.
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (AR-F14N)
The staple and pamphlet staple functions can be used. For detailed information, see the manual that accompanies
the saddle stitch finisher.
JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT (AR-TR3)
This enables separation of output locations by mode (copy, printer, etc.).
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P27)
This allows the machine to be used as a network printer.
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE KIT (MX-AMX1)
The application integration module can be used in combination with the network scanner function to attach
metadata to a scanned image file before it is transmitted.
MACRO FONT FLASH ROM KIT (AR-PF2)
Fonts and forms can be downloaded and stored.
1
PS3 EXPANSION KIT (AR-PK1N)*
This kit offers PostScript 3 compatibility.
1
BARCODE FONT KIT (AR-PF1)*
This font set adds barcode printing capability.
2
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT (AR-NS2)*
This allows the machine to be used as a network scanner.
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT (AR-FX7)
This allows the machine can be used as a facsimile machine.
8MB FAX MEMORY (AR-MM9)
Image memory can be expanded by installing the optional fax expansion memory.
256MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM5)
512MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM6)
Additional memory can be installed in the machine. There are two DIMM slots in this machine, and the memory
can be expanded to a maximum of 1056 MB.
1
* Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P27).
2
* Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P27), and 128MB or more of memory must be
extended.
A commercial 64/128/256/512MB (the 168 pin SDRAM DIMM) memory module can be used to expand memory
in this unit. For more information, consult your SHARP service center.
Note
78
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
FINISHER (AR-FN5A)
When an optional finisher (AR-FN5A) is installed, the machine can automatically staple the sorted copies. Each
collated set of copies or group of copies can be stacked offset from the previous set. (Offset function p.35)
Part names
Stapler compiler cover
Top cover
Top tray
Offset tray
Stapler cover
Specifications
AR-FN5A
Top tray
100 sheets
Tray capacity
Offset tray
1,000 sheets (500 sheets for sizes larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4))
Top tray: 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" (A5 to A3)
Offset tray: 8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17" (B5 to A3)
6
Size
Paper size
Offset
2
2
Weight
14 lbs. to 34 lbs. (52 g/m to 128 g/m )
Approx. 1" (27 mm)
Paper sizes that can be
stapled
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" (B5, A4, A4R, B4, A3)
2
Stapling capacity
Power supply
Weight
30 sheets (21 lbs. (80 g/m ))
Drawn from the machine
Approx. 42 lbs. (19 kg)
18-33/64" (W) x 20-1/8" (D) x 21-17/64" (H)
Exit area
Dimensions
(470 mm (W) x 511 mm (D) x 540 mm (H))
22-9/64" (W) x 17-31/64" (D) x 4-19/64" (H)
Stapler compiler
(562 mm (W) x 444 mm (D) x 109 mm (H))
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
79
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
These paper feed units provide the convenience of increased paper capacity for the machine and a greater choice of
paper sizes readily available for copying.
The AR-D30 contains one 500-sheet paper tray and the AR-D31 contains two 500-sheet paper trays.
Part names
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
2x500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
(AR-D30)
(AR-D31)
Side cover
Side cover
Tray
Tray
Specifications
AR-D30
AR-D31
Size
8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17" (B5 to A3)
Paper
2
2
Weight
15 lbs. to 28 lbs. (56 g/m to 105 g/m )
Upper tray 500 sheets
500 sheets
Paper
capacity
Lower tray
—
500 sheets
Weight
Approx. 13.5 lbs. (6.1kg)
Approx. 26.1 lbs. (11.8kg)
23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 3-53/64" (H) 23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 7-53/64" (H)
Dimensions
Power supply
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm (D) x 97 mm (H))
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm(D) x 194 mm(H))
Drawn from the machine
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
80
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES
Standard supplies for this product that are to be replaced by the user are paper and the toner cartridge.
For best copying results, be sure to use only SHARP Genuine Supplies which are designed, engineered
and tested to maximize the life and performance of SHARP copiers. Look for the Genuine Supplies label
on the toner package.
GENUINE SUPPLIES
PROPER STORAGE
Store the supplies in a location that is:
• clean and dry,
• at a stable temperature,
• not exposed to direct sunlight.
Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.
Paper stored out of the wrapper or in packages
standing on end may curl or get damp, resulting in
paper misfeeds.
6
81
Chapter 7
APPENDIX
7
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AR-M257
AR-M317
Type
Digital Multifunction System, Desktop
OPC drum
Photoconductive type
Document glass type
Copy system
Originals
Fixed
Dry, electrostatic transfer
Sheets, bound documents
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)
Originals size
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)
Min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A6)
Image loss: Max. 5/32" (4 mm) (leading and trailing edges)
Max. 11/64" (6 mm) (along other edges in total)
Copy size
600 dpi:
600 dpi:
13 copies/min. (11" x 17")
14 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
18 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
25 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
25 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
17 copies/min. (11" x 17")
19 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
24 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
31 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
31 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
Copying speed
(one-sided copying at
100% copy ratio)
Continuous copy
First-copy time*
Warm-up time*
Max. 999 copies; subtractive counter
Approx. 4.8 sec.
Approx. 23 sec.
600 dpi:
Copy ratio
Variable: 25% to 400%, in 1% increments (total 376 steps)
Fixed preset: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
Document glass: Moving optical source, slit exposure (stationary platen) with
automatic exposure function
Exposure system
RSPF:
Moving original
Paper feed
Two automatic feeding paper trays (500 sheets x 2) + bypass tray (100 sheets)
Fusing system
Developer system
Light source
Resolution
Heat rollers
Magnetic brush development
Xenon lamp
Scan: 400 dpi
Output: 600 dpi
(AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO mode)
Scanning: 256
Printing: 2 value
Gradation
Power supply
AC 120V, 60 Hz, 12A
Max. 1.45 kW
Power consumption
Overall dimensions
(with bypass tray folded)
24-17/32" (W) x 24" (D) (623 mm (W) x 609.5 mm (D))
Weight
Approx. 103.7 lbs. (47 kg) (Not includes toner cartridge)
82
APPENDIX
24-17/32" (W) x 24" (D) x 30-15/16" (H)
(623mm (W) x 609.5mm (D) x 785.5mm (H))
Dimensions
Operating conditions
Temperature: 59°F to 86°F (15°C to 30°C), Humidity: 20% to 85%
Sound Power Level LwA(1B=10dB)
Copying: 6.3[B]
Standby: 3.6[B]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (bystander positions)
Copying: 50[dB(A)]
Noise level
Standby: 25[dB(A)]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (operator position)
Copying: 51[dB(A)]
Standby: 20[dB(A)]
Noise emission measurement in accordance with ISO 7779.
3
Emission concentration
(measured according to Dust:
RAL-UZ62)
Ozone: 0.02 mg/m or less
3
0.075 mg/m or less
3
Styrene: 0.07 mg/m or less
* The first-copy time and warm-up time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other
operating conditions.
Reversing single pass feeder (RSPF)
2
2
2
2
9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m to 128 g/m ) (14 lbs. to 28 lbs. (52 g/m to 105 g/m ) for
Weight
two-sided original)
Acceptable
original
Size
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"
Capacity
Up to 100 sheets (Thickness 33/64" (13 mm) and below)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
(A4, A3)
Detectable original sizes
Weight
17.4 lbs. (7.9 kg)
22-61/64" (W) x 17-9/64" (D) x 5-1/4" (H)
(586 mm (W) x 457 mm (D) x 145 mm (H))
Dimensions
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units. There may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
7
83
Page: 1/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name
: AR-270NT / AR-270T / AR-270ST / AR-270FT / AR-270NT-J /
AR-270ST-C/ AR-270FT-T (Black Toner)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
U.S.A.
(Name and Telephone Number)
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
: 1-800-237-4277
: 1-800-255-3924
North
America
Canada
Australia
Germany
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
: 905-890-2100
: 1-800-255-3924
Oceania
Telephone number for information
: 1300-13-50-22
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
For more information
: 040-2376-2185
: 040-2376-2613
United
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Kingdom
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
: 01-49-90-34-00
: 01-727-19-0
: 02895951
France
Austria
Italy
Europe
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
: 30-6359500
: 08-634-36-00
: 01-846-6111
Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Telephone number for information
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
Telephone number for information
Middle
East
: 04-815311
2. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
Ingredient
CAS No.
Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA NOHSC-TWA
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
29497-14-1
85-95%
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
3
3
3
Carbon black
Iron oxide
Metal Complex dye* 109125-51-1
84179-66-8
1333-86-4
1309-38-2
5-10%
1-5%
< 2%
3.5mg/m
3.5mg/m
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
3mg/m
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
3
3
0.5mg/m
0.5mg/m
}
* EC N0. : 400-110-2, Symbol letter : F, R Phrase : R11
84
Page: 2/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do
not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : No data are available.
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe): Not classified as dangerous
4. FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
Yes
No
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact: Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical
personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water . If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5. FIRE –FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO , foam and dry chemicals
2
Special Fire fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an
explosive mixture.
6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
Methods for Cleaning Up
: None
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large
amount is released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of
creating a dust explosion.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures : None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during
long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures : None
Storage Conditions : Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products: None
8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
85
Page: 3/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
Exposure limit values
OSHA-PEL (USA)
ACGIH-TLV (USA)
3
3
: 15mg/m (Total Dust) , 5mg/m (Respirable Dust)
3
3
: 10mg/m (Total Dust) , 3mg/m (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State:Solid
Ph
Boiling/Melting Point
Softening Point (°C)
Flash Point (°C )
Form: Powder
Color:Black
Odor:odorless
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: 100 - 130
: Not applicable
: > 350
: No data
: 1.1 (bulk density : 0.35)
: Negligible
Ignition Point (°C )
Explosion Properties
3
Density (g/cm )
Solubility in water
10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
: Stable
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO and NO
2
X
Further Information
: None
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion (oral)
Inhalation
: LD > 2000mg/kg (Rats)
50
: LC > 4.97mg/L
50
Eye irritation
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
: No sensitization
Skin irritation
Skin sensitizer
Mutagenicity
Carcinogenicity
: Negative (Ames Test)
: In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate
human evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of
carcinogenicity. The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats
receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle
overload of the lung. Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show
any association between carbon black and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer
bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no
association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats.
86
Page: 4/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
Chronic Effect
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate
degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration
3
(16mg/m ) exposure group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of
3
the animals in the middle (4mg/m ) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was
3
reported in the lowest (1mg/m ) exposure group, the most relevant level to potential
human exposures.
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
No data are available.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all
federal, state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA (Toxic Substances Control Act):
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA (Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance: None
311/312 Hazard Classification
EU Information
: None
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
R-Phrase
: Not required
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules
or order under 76/769/EEC.
16. OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1 Flammability=1 Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
List of R phrases
References
: R11 : Highly flammable
IARC (1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol.
65, Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon,
pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow,
U.Mohr, S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein (1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation
Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling
of this product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be
used with caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only
hazards which exist.
87
Page: 1/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name : AR-271ND / AR-271DV / AR-271SD / AR-271SD-C (Black Developer)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
U.S.A.
(Name and Telephone Number)
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
For more information
: 1-800-237-4277
: 1-800-255-3924
North
America
Canada
Australia
Germany
: 905-890-2100
: 1-800-255-3924
Oceania
: 1300-13-50-22
: 040-2376-2185
: 040-2376-2613
United
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Kingdom
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
: 01-49-90-34-00
: 01-727-19-0
: 02895951
France
Austria
Italy
Europe
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
: 30-6359500
: 08-634-36-00
: 01-846-6111
Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Telephone number for information
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
Telephone number for information
Middle
East
: 04-815311
2. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
Ingredient
Iron powder
CAS No.
7439-89-6
29497-14-1
Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA NOHSC-TWA
> 90%
5-10%
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
3
3
3
Carbon black
1333-86-4
< 1%
3.5mg/m
3.5mg/m
Not listed
3mg/m
88
Page: 2/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do
not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : No data are available.
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe): Not classified as dangerous
4. FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
No
No
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact: Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical
personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water . If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5. FIRE –FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO , foam and dry chemicals
2
Special Fire fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an
explosive mixture.
6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
Methods for Cleaning Up
: None
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large
amount is released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of
creating a dust explosion.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures : None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during
long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures : None
Storage Conditions : Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products: None
8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
89
Page: 3/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
Exposure limit values
OSHA-PEL (USA)
ACGIH-TLV (USA)
3
3
: 15mg/m (Total Dust) , 5mg/m (Respirable Dust)
3
3
: 10mg/m (Total Dust) , 3mg/m (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State:Solid
Ph
Boiling/Melting Point
Flash Point (°C )
Form: Powder
Color:Black
Odor:odorless
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: No data
: No data
: 7.3 (bulk density : 2.0)
: Negligible
Ignition Point (°C )
Explosion Properties
3
Density (g/cm )
Solubility in water
10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
: Stable
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO and NO
2
X
Further Information
: None
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion (oral)
Inhalation
: LD > 2500mg/kg (Rats)
: No data
50
Eye irritation
: No data
Skin irritation
Skin sensitizer
Mutagenicity
Carcinogenicity
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
: No sensitization
: Negative (Ames Test)
: In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate
human evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of
carcinogenicity. The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats
receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle
overload of the lung. Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show
any association between carbon black and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer
bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no
association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats.
90
Page: 4/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
Chronic Effect
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate
degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration
3
(16mg/m ) exposure group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of
3
the animals in the middle (4mg/m ) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was
3
reported in the lowest (1mg/m ) exposure group, the most relevant level to potential
human exposures.
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
No data are available.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all
federal, state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA (Toxic Substances Control Act):
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA (Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance: None
311/312 Hazard Classification
EU Information
: None
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
R-Phrase
: Not required
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules
or order under 76/769/EEC.
16. OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1 Flammability=1 Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
References
IARC (1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol.
65, Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon,
pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow,
U.Mohr, S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein (1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation
Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling
of this product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be
used with caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only
hazards which exist.
91
INDEX
Symbols
[COPY] key ................................................ 21, 74, 76
Copy number display ............................................. 21
Copy ratio display................................................... 21
[COPY RATIO] key .................................... 21, 31, 32
Cover copy ............................................................. 48
[COVER] key.................................................... 39, 49
Custom settings ..................................................... 53
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key .................. 10, 19, 20, 54
[#/P] key ...................................................... 10, 56, 57
2 - 8
2 x 500-sheet paper feed unit ..................... 71, 78, 80
256MB expansion memory board ........................... 78
[2-SIDED COPY] key .................................. 21, 27, 28
500-sheet paper feed unit ........................... 71, 78, 80
512MB expansion memory board ........................... 78
8MB fax memory..................................................... 78
D
[DELETE] key......................................................... 57
[DETAIL] key .......................................................... 12
Disabling of two-sided printing on
A
ABCDEF configuration............................................ 55
[ACC.#-C] key ................................................... 10, 58
Account number...................................................... 58
Adjusting the exposure............................................ 29
Auditing mode ......................................................... 58
[AUTO IMAGE] key................................................. 30
Auto tray switching.................................................. 55
Automatic ratio selection......................................... 30
Automatic two-sided copying
letterhead paper ..................................................... 55
Display contrast................................................ 53, 55
Display message.................................................... 60
Display switching key ............................................. 12
Document feeder cover...................................... 8, 67
Document feeder tray................................... 8, 23, 67
Document glass ....................................................... 8
Document transport cover.................................. 8, 67
Document transport cover knob ......................... 8, 67
Dual page copy ...................................................... 43
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key................................. 39, 43
- Document glass ............................................... 27
- RSPF ............................................................... 28
AZERTY configuration ............................................ 55
B
E
B/W reverse copy.................................................... 50
[B/W REVERSE] key......................................... 39, 50
Barcode font kit ....................................................... 78
[BINDING CHANGE] key ........................................ 27
Bypass feed ............................................................ 26
Bypass tray ............................................. 9, 26, 68, 77
Bypass tray extension......................................... 9, 18
[BYPASS TRAY] key............................................... 20
Bypass tray paper feed roller .................................. 77
Bypass tray paper guides.......................................... 9
Enlargement key .................................................... 31
Envelope .......................................................... 15, 16
Erase copy ............................................................. 42
[ERASE] key .................................................... 39, 42
Erase mode
- Center erase ................................................... 42
- Edge erase...................................................... 42
- Edge+center erase.......................................... 42
Erase width ............................................................ 42
Error message........................................................ 60
Exit area ............................................................. 8, 67
Exposure adjustment ............................................. 29
Exposure display.................................................... 21
[EXPOSURE] key............................................. 21, 29
Exposure value guidelines ..................................... 29
Extra image adjust ................................................. 26
C
Card shot..................................................................51
[CARD SHOT] key .............................................39, 51
Cautions on handling the machine ............................4
Cautions on using the machine................................. 3
Center tray .......................................................... 8, 70
Center tray counter function.................................... 24
Changing a tray’s paper tray
F
Facsimile expansion kit .......................................... 78
[FAX JOB] key........................................................ 12
[FAX] key
and paper size settings ........................................... 19
Checking the toner quantity .................................... 76
Cleaning the machine
- DATA indicator................................................ 10
- LINE indicator.................................................. 10
Finisher .......................................... 37, 72, 75, 78, 79
Front cover ............................................. 8, 68, 69, 74
Fusing unit paper guide...................................... 9, 69
Fusing unit release lever .................................... 9, 69
- Bypass tray paper feed roller........................... 77
- Document glass ............................................... 77
- RSPF ............................................................... 77
[CLEAR ALL] key .............................................. 10, 14
[CLEAR] key................................................ 10, 22, 23
Clock ....................................................................... 53
Color paper ............................................................. 15
Copy finishing functions
- Group copy ...................................................... 35
- Offset function.................................................. 35
- Sort copy.......................................................... 35
- Staple sort........................................................ 37
G
Grayed out ............................................................. 11
Group copy............................................................. 35
[GROUP] key ......................................................... 36
92
H
Misfeed removal
Handles..................................................................... 8
Heavy paper............................................................ 15
How to place the original
- Document glass ............................................... 22
- RSPF ............................................................... 23
- Bypass tray ..................................................... 68
- Center tray ...................................................... 70
- Lower paper tray ............................................. 71
- Machine........................................................... 68
- Output tray ...................................................... 72
- RSPF............................................................... 67
- Upper exit tray................................................. 72
- Upper paper tray ............................................. 70
Misfeed removal guidance ..................................... 66
Mixed feeding......................................................... 25
Mode select keys ................................................... 10
Mode switching key................................................ 12
Multi shot copy ....................................................... 46
[MULTI SHOT] key........................................... 39, 46
I
Icon (Job status screen).......................................... 12
Important points when inserting paper
in the bypass tray.................................................... 18
Important points when selecting an installation site.. 3
[INFORMATION] key .............................................. 66
Initial settings .......................................................... 14
[INTERRUPT] key............................................. 10, 34
Interrupting copy ..................................................... 34
N
J
Network scanner expansion kit .............................. 78
Normal copying
[JOB BUILD] key............................................... 39, 45
Job build mode.................................................. 23, 45
Job list..................................................................... 12
Job program
- Deleting............................................................ 57
- Executing ......................................................... 57
- Storing............................................................. 56
Job separator tray ............................................... 8, 78
[JOB STATUS] key ........................................... 10, 12
Job status screen.................................................... 12
- Document glass .............................................. 22
- RSPF............................................................... 23
Number of pages fed through the RSPF................ 55
Number of pages sent using the
network scanner function ....................................... 55
Number of sent and received fax pages ................ 55
Number of times the stapler was used................... 55
Number of two-sided copies................................... 55
Numeric keys ......................................................... 10
L
O
Label ....................................................................... 15
Layout ..................................................................... 46
Letterhead paper......................................... 15, 16, 27
List print............................................................. 53, 55
Loading paper ......................................................... 15
Loading paper in the bypass tray............................ 18
Loading the paper in the paper tray ........................ 17
Offset function .................................................. 35, 36
Offset tray................................................... 35, 73, 79
Operation panel........................................................ 8
Optional equipment ................................................ 78
Orientation of the original (Staple sort) .................. 37
Original feed display............................................... 21
Original guides ......................................................... 8
Original image type
- Photo............................................................... 29
- Text ................................................................. 29
- Text/photo ....................................................... 29
Original size ......................................... 22, 23, 24, 47
Original size display ............................................... 21
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key ...................................... 39, 47
Originals that can be used in the RSPF................. 24
[OUTPUT] key...................................... 21, 35, 36, 38
Output tray ............................................................. 72
M
Main screen of copy mode...................................... 21
[MANUAL] key......................................................... 47
Manual ratio selection ............................................. 31
Margin shift copy..................................................... 41
[MARGIN SHIFT] key........................................ 39, 41
Material safety data sheet....................................... 84
[MENU] key............................................................. 31
Message display ..................................................... 21
Misfed original......................................................... 67
Misfeed in an output tray......................................... 72
Misfeed in the bypass tray ...................................... 68
Misfeed in the center tray........................................ 70
Misfeed in the fusing area....................................... 69
Misfeed in the lower paper tray............................... 71
Misfeed in the machine ........................................... 68
Misfeed in the paper feed area ............................... 68
Misfeed in the upper exit area................................. 72
Misfeed in the upper paper tray .............................. 70
P
Pamphlet copy ....................................................... 44
[PAMPHLET COPY] key .................................. 39, 44
Paper...................................................................... 15
Paper capacity ....................................................... 15
Paper guide............................................................ 73
Paper misfeeds ...................................................... 64
Paper select display ............................................... 21
[PAPER SELECT] key ................... 20, 21, 22, 23, 26
Paper size ........................................................ 15, 19
Paper size card ...................................................... 17
Paper size display .................................................. 21
Paper tray......................................... 9, 15, 17, 19, 70
93
Paper type................................................... 15, 19, 20
Paper weight ........................................................... 15
Part names and functions
[SPECIAL MODES] key ............................. 21, 39, 40
Special papers
- Envelope ......................................................... 16
- Letterhead paper............................................. 16
Special papers ....................................................... 26
Specifications ......................................................... 82
Staple box .............................................................. 75
Staple cartridge ...................................................... 75
Staple cartridge replacement ................................ 75
Staple cover ..................................................... 76, 79
Staple jam removal ................................................ 76
Staple sort.............................................................. 37
[STAPLE SORT] key.............................................. 38
Stapler compiler ..................................................... 73
Stapler compiler cover ........................................... 72
Stapler cover .......................................................... 75
Stapling positions ................................................... 37
[START] key............................................... 10, 22, 23
[STOP/DELETE] key.............................................. 12
Storage of supplies ................................................ 81
[STORE/DELETE] key ..................................... 56, 57
Stream feeding mode............................................. 23
- Operation panel ............................................... 10
Peripheral devices................................................... 78
Photoconductive drum ........................................ 9, 68
Plain paper.............................................................. 15
Points to note when making copies......................... 24
Power off................................................................. 13
Power on................................................................. 13
Power outlet .............................................................. 4
Power save modes
- Auto power shut-off mode................................ 14
- Preheat mode .................................................. 14
Power switch....................................................... 8, 13
Preset enlargement ratios....................................... 31
[PRINT JOB] key..................................................... 12
[PRINT] key
- DATA indicator................................................. 10
- ONLINE indicator............................................. 10
Print server card...................................................... 78
Printer expansion kit................................................ 78
[PRIORITY] key....................................................... 12
PS3 expansion kit ................................................... 78
T
Thin paper.............................................................. 15
Toner cartridge................................................... 9, 74
Toner cartridge lock release lever...................... 9, 74
Top cover ............................................................... 79
Top tray............................................................ 73, 79
Total count ................................................. 53, 55, 76
Total number of copies and printed pages............. 55
Touch panel ..................................................... 10, 11
Transparency film....................................... 15, 16, 27
Tray number..................................................... 15, 19
Tray settings......................................... 19, 20, 53, 55
[TRAY SETTINGS] key .................................... 19, 20
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 62
Q
QWERTY configuration........................................... 55
R
[READ-END] key................................... 36, 38, 45, 46
Recycled paper ....................................................... 15
Reduction key ......................................................... 31
Reduction/enlargement/zoom ................................. 30
Release roller.......................................................... 67
Replacing the toner cartridge.................................. 74
Reversing tray..................................................... 8, 67
Roller rotating knob....................................... 9, 68, 69
Rotation copying ..................................................... 25
RSPF .................................................... 23, 24, 67, 83
U
Upper exit area....................................................... 72
Upper right side cover ........................................ 9, 72
Using the touch panel ............................................ 11
S
[SCAN] key.........................................................10, 12
- DATA indicator................................................. 10
Selecting the original image type ............................ 29
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray
- [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.............................. 20
- [PAPER SELECT] key ..................................... 20
Shift direction .......................................................... 41
Side cover ........................................................... 9, 69
Side cover handle ..................................................... 9
Sort copy................................................................. 35
[SORT] key.............................................................. 36
Special modes
W
Warm-up ................................................................ 13
X
[X] key .................................................................... 33
XY ZOOM copying ................................................. 32
[XY ZOOM] key ...................................................... 32
Y
[Y] key .................................................................... 33
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 50
- Cover copy....................................................... 48
- Dual page copy................................................ 43
- Erase copy....................................................... 42
- Job build mode................................................. 45
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 41
- Multi shot copy................................................. 46
- Original size ..................................................... 47
- Pamphlet copy ................................................. 44
94
INDEX BY PURPOSE
Preparations
Special modes, using
Bypass tray, loading paper in...................................18
Initial settings, returning to .......................................14
Paper size, changing................................................19
Paper type, changing ...............................................19
Paper, loading..........................................................17
Power, turning off.....................................................13
Power, turning on.....................................................13
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 50
- Card shot copy................................................. 51
- Cover copy....................................................... 48
- Dual page copy ................................................ 43
- Erase copy ....................................................... 42
- Job build mode................................................. 45
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 41
- Multi shot copy ................................................. 46
- Original size ..................................................... 47
- Pamphlet copy ................................................. 44
Staple sort function, using....................................... 37
Making copies
Auditing mode, copying when enabled ....................58
Automatic two-sided copying
- Document glass ................................................27
- RSPF ................................................................28
Bypass tray, copying from........................................26
Copy run, stopping.............................................22, 23
Copying
- Document glass ................................................22
- RSPF ................................................................23
Document glass, copying from.................................22
Enlarging/reducing copies
- Automatic ratio selection...................................30
- Manual ratio selection.......................................31
- XY zoom copying..............................................32
Exposure, adjusting..................................................29
Exposure, selecting..................................................29
Image orientation, changing...............................27, 28
Interrupt copying ......................................................34
Mixed feeding...........................................................25
Original image type, selecting..................................29
Paper size (tray), selecting manually .......................22
RSPF, copying from.................................................23
Special paper, copying on........................................26
Stream feeding mode, using ....................................23
Making the machine easier to use
Canceling a job ....................................................... 12
Canceling a job in progress..................................... 12
Date and time, setting ............................................. 55
Deleting a job .......................................................... 12
Display contrast, adjusting ...................................... 55
Job details, displaying ............................................. 12
Job program, deleting ............................................. 57
Job program, executing........................................... 57
Job program, storing ............................................... 56
Keyboard, changing ................................................ 55
Lists, printing ........................................................... 55
Priority, giving to a specified job.............................. 12
Total count, displaying ............................................ 55
Trays, configuring settings ...................................... 55
User settings, configuring........................................ 53
Troubleshooting and maintenance
Cleaning the machine ............................................. 77
Misfeeds, removing
- Bypass tray ...................................................... 68
- Center tray ....................................................... 70
- Lower paper tray .............................................. 71
- Machine............................................................ 68
- Output tray ....................................................... 72
- RSPF................................................................ 67
- Upper exit area................................................. 72
- Upper paper tray .............................................. 70
Staple cartridge, replacing ...................................... 75
Staple jams, removing............................................. 76
Toner cartridge, replacing ....................................... 74
Toner, checking....................................................... 76
Total count, checking .............................................. 76
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 62
Using convenient copy functions
Black and white reverse copying..............................50
Cover, adding to copies ...........................................48
Dual page copying ...................................................43
Erase copying ..........................................................42
Group copying, using ...............................................35
Large number of originals, copying..........................45
Margin, creating .......................................................41
Multi shot copying ....................................................46
Offset function, using ...............................................35
Original size, specifying ...........................................47
Pamphlet copying.....................................................44
Selecting finishing functions
- Group copying...................................................35
- Offset function...................................................35
- Sort copying......................................................35
- Staple sort function ...........................................37
Sort copying, using...................................................35
95
Trademark acknowledgments
The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral
devices and accessories.
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
• Microsoft , Windows , Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
®
®
Windows Server 2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc.
• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv, Garamond
and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus, Arial,
Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United States
Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph, Mona Lisa,
Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima, Palatino, Stempel
Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered in certain
jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.
Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may be registered in certain
jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh Company, Ltd. and may be
registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a
trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark of Johnathan Hoefler and may
be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent
and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be
registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the
United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks
of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries. PostScript is a trademark
of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL, FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1 processor resident in Monotype Imaging's
UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
Connectors
Caution:
This connector is only intended for service purposes.
Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions
of the copy machine.
Instruction for service technician:
The cable length for the service terminal has to be less
than 10 feet (3 m).
RSPF connector
Finisher connector
Parallel connector
USB connector
NOTICE for users in the USA
BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE
WARRANTY THAT YOUR SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU. In order to
assure you, the end-user, of warranty protection, Sharp extends a limited warranty to
each of its authorized dealers and, in turn, requires each of its authorized dealers to
extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those given
to the dealer by Sharp. You should be aware, however, that Sharp does not itself
extend any warranties, either express or implied, directly to you, the end-user, and no
one is authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp.
Specifically, SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU, THE END-USER, ANY
EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN
CONNECTION WITH THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED
IN, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT. Sharp is not responsible
for any damages or loss, either direct, incidental or consequential, which you, the
end-user, may experience as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware,
software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this Product. Your sole
remedy, in the event that you encounter any difficulties with this Product, is against
the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product.
AR-M257 Digital Multifunctional System
AR-M317 Digital Multifunctional System
In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments,
please contact the General Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics
Corporation, Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ 07430-1163, so that Sharp can try to help
assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to which you are entitled from
the authorized dealer.
AR-M257/AR-M317 (for copier)
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1163.
www.sharpusa.com
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink
to help protect the environment.
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper
PRINTED IN CHINA
2007B
KS1
TINSE1678QSZZ
MODEL
AR-M256 AR-M316
AR-M257 AR-M317
AR-M258 AR-M318
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
(for network scanner)
Page
• INTRODUCTION
1
•
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION
3
•
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION
20
32
37
42
• TROUBLESHOOTING
• METADATA DELIVERY
• SPECIFICATIONS
Warranty
While every effort has been made to make this operation manual as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP
Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to
change without notice. SHARP is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related
to the use of this operation manual.
INTRODUCTION
The network scanner expansion Kit enables the machine to be used as a network scanner.
• To enable the network scanner function of this machine, a product key (password) must be entered using a key
operator program. This is only required once. Use the "PRODUCT KEY" program to enter the product key. If you
do not know your product key, please ask your dealer. (For information on using key operator programs, refer to
key operator's guide.)
• The printer expansion kit (AR-P17) and at least 128 MB of memory* are required to use the network scanner
function.
• The procedure for installing the software programs that are contained in the "Network Scanner Utilities"
CD-ROM (included in the network scanner expansion kit) is explained on page 37 of this manual.
For the procedures for using the software programs, see the user's guides on the CD-ROM. (p.39)
* Memory can be added by installing a commercially available 128 MB or 256 MB memory module (144-pin SDRAM
SODIMM). For more information, consult your dealer.
● This manual only explains features that can be used when the Network Scanner Expansion Kit is installed. For
information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral devices,
and other copier-related information, please refer to your operation manual for copier.
● The explanations in this manual assume that the person who will install the product and the users of the product
have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows.
● In this manual, American spellings are used.
● For information on the operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
● The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are for Windows XP. The screens may vary
depending on your Windows version and settings.
● This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the "RSPF".
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION............................................... 1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
TROUBLESHOOTING
1
3
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION.... 3
TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................32
● DISPLAY MESSAGES.................................. 33
● IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED ................. 34
● IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO
E-MAIL.......................................................... 35
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED
FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE........ 4
● SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION....................................4
● ACCESSING WEB PAGES .............................4
● ABOUT THE WEB PAGE ................................5
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS.......................36
●
●
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING ...6
SMTP SERVER AND DNS SERVER SETTINGS.....7
METADATA DELIVERY
4
● CONFIGURING LDAP SERVER SETTINGS
(WHEN USING AN LDAP SERVER)...............8
● PROGRAMMING CUSTOM INDEX NAMES...9
METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)........37
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
●
SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION .....10
TRANSMISSION..............................................38
● STORING THE SENDER INFORMATION
(Scan to E-mail) .............................................15
● PROTECTING INFORMATION
●
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES...............38
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO
DESKTOP................................................................38
●
PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE
TRANSMITTING METADATA.........................39
("Passwords") ................................................16
● RESTRICTING USE OF THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION (USER
●
METADATA FIELDS....................................... 41
AUTHENTICATION) ......................................17
SPECIFICATIONS
5
INITIAL SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE ....... 18
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
2
SENDING AN IMAGE ..................................... 20
● BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD ...............20
●
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL .......22
● SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING A
TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL (when an RSPF is
installed).........................................................24
● SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS (when an RSPF is installed)......25
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE,
QUALITY, RESOLUTION, FILE FORMAT, AND
SEND SETTING)............................................. 26
●
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE.......26
● SELECTING THE QUALITY..........................27
● SELECTING THE RESOLUTION..................28
● SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT..................29
● CHANGING THE SEND SETTINGS .............30
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP TRANSMISSION....... 31
2
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
1
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER
FUNCTION
When the network scanner function is added to the machine, a document or photo can be scanned into an image file
and sent over a network or the Internet to a file server, e-mail destination, or your own computer. The scanned
image can be sent to the following types of destinations:
1. The scanned image can be sent to a memory
storage device on a network (a designated
directory on an FTP server). (This is called
"Scan to FTP" in this manual.)
When sending scanned image to an FTP
server, an e-mail message can also be sent to a
preset e-mail address to inform the recipient of
the location of the scanned image data. (This is
called "Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)" in this
manual.)
2. A scanned image can be sent to a computer
connected to the same network as the
machine. (This is called "Scan to Desktop" in
this manual.)
* Before Scan to Desktop can be performed, the
"Network Scanner Tool" software in the
CD-ROM that accompanied the Network
Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2) must be
installed. For information on Scan to Desktop
system requirements, installing the Network
Scanner Tool, and storing the destination, see
the Users Guide for the Network Scanner Tool
on the CD-ROM that accompanies the network
scanner expansion kit.
3. The scanned image can be sent to an e-mail
recipient. (This is called "Scan to E-mail" in
this manual.)
* A limit is set in the Web page for the size of
image files that can be sent using Scan to
E-mail (p.6).
3
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING
REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK
SCANNER FEATURE
To use the Network Scanner feature, settings for the SMTP server, DNS server, and destination addresses must be
established.
To establish the settings, use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the
machine's Web page. The Web page can be displayed with your Web browser (Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, or
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later).
SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
To use transmit images using the network scanner function, configure the settings in the Web pages as follows:
Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)
Scan to E-mail
Scan to Desktop
Access the Web pages (see below)
Configure basic settings for network scanning (p.6)
Configure your SMTP and DNS server settings (p.7)
Configure LDAP server settings
(when using an LDAP server) (p.8)
Store destination information (p.10 to 13)
Store your sender information (p.15)
The following settings can also be configured to enable convenient use of the network scanner function:
• Programming custom index names. (p.9)
• Setting passwords. (p.16)
ACCESSING WEB PAGES
Use the following procedure to access the Web pages.
Open the Web browser on your
computer.
In the "Address" field of your Web
browser, enter the IP address of the
machine as a URL.
1
2
Supported browsers:Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or
later
Enter the IP address that
has been programmed in
the machine.
If you do not know the IP
address, see page 36.
When the connection is completed, the Web
page will appear in your Web browser. (p.5)
4
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE
When you access the Web page in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the
right frame that allows you to establish settings for that item.
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.
1
2
3
4
1
5
1
Menu frame
Click the menu items displayed here to configure the corresponding settings.
2
Destination (p.10)
Set up destinations for Scan to FTP, Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), Scan to Desktop, and Scan to E-mail. You can also
edit or delete previously set destination information.
3
Sender (p.15)
Enter the sender's information that appears in the recipient's e-mail program (sender name and e-mail address)
when you send an image using Scan to E-mail.
If user authentication is being used, enter the login name.
4
Network Scanning (p.6)
This lets you select transmission methods for the network scanner function, configure settings for Scan to
E-mail, and program group indexes.
5
Services (p.7)
This lets you establish SMTP server settings, DNS server settings, and WINS server settings for Scan to E-mail
and Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), and for entering a host name instead of an IP address when storing a transmission
destination. Configure LDAP server settings if an LDAP server is used.
5
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu frame, and then establish the required settings. These settings should only be
established by the network administrator.
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu
frame.
Set a limit for the size of image files.
1
4
A limit can be set for the size of image files sent
by Scan to E-mail to prevent excessively large
files from being sent.
The Network Scanning
Setup page appears.
If the image file created from the scanned image
is larger than the set limit, the image file is
discarded. The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10
MB in increments of 1 MB.
The factory default setting is "Unlimited". If you wish to
set a limit, remove the checkmark from the "Unlimited"
checkbox and enter the desired limit in "Upper Limit".
Select the transmission methods that
you wish to use.
Select the scanner delivery methods that you
want to use. In the "Enable Scanner Delivery to:"
field, click the checkbox next to each method that
you want to use so that a checkmark appears in
the checkbox.
2
Select the method for assigning a file
name to a scanned image.
Select the method for assigning a file name to a
scanned image. In "File Naming", click the items
that you wish to use in the file name. "Destination
Name" and "Date & Time" are initially selected.
5
All transmission methods are initially selected
(factory default settings).
•
If you are going to send images to the same
recipient more than once, we recommend that
you also select "Session Page Counter" or
"Unique Identifier" to prevent sending multiple
files with the same name, which would result in
each successive file overwriting the previous file.
Note
• If a file name is entered at the time of
transmission, the file name entered here
will be disregarded.
Selecting an e-mail subject (only used
for Scan to E-mail).
6
7
The setting is used to enter the subject that
appears in the recipient's e-mail program when
you perform Scan to E-mail. (This setting is not
necessary if you will not be using Scan to E-mail.)
The subject can be up to 80 characters long. Only
one subject can be entered. If nothing is entered,
"Scanned image from <Device Name>" will appear.
* The name that appears in <Device Name> is
the name stored in "Name" in the screen that
appears when you click "System Information" in
the menu frame. If a name has not been stored,
the product name will appear.
Configure the Advanced Setup settings.
3
Select advanced functions that can be used for
Scan to E-mail.
Select the checkboxes of the functions that you
wish to use.
If a subject is entered at the time of transmission,
the subject entered here will be disregarded.
Note
• The "Enable User Authentication" checkbox
can be selected to restrict use of the network
scanner function to authorized users. (p.17)
• To allow a sender to be selected when sending
an image by Scan to E-mail, make sure that
"Disable selection of sender from Sender List"
is not selected. (p.30)
Click "Submit".
After entering the
settings, be sure to click
"Submit" to store them.
• If you wish to Bcc a copy of a Scan to E-mail
transmission to an e-mail address, select the
"Bcc:" checkbox and enter the e-mail address.
6
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SMTP SERVER AND DNS SERVER SETTINGS
SMTP is used to transmit e-mail that is sent using Scan to E-mail or Scan to FTP (Hyperlink). To use these
transmission methods, your SMTP server settings must be configured.
Configuring SMTP server settings
Click "Services" in the menu frame.
Enter the required information in
"SMTP Setup".
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
1
3
4
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
1
Click "SMTP".
2
Configuring DNS server settings
If you entered a host name in "Primary SMTP Server" or "Secondary SMTP Server" of "SMTP Setup", you must also
configure your DNS server settings.
You will also need to configure your DNS server settings if host names will be entered in "Hostname or IP Address"
when storing destinations for Scan to FTP (Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)) or Scan to Desktop.
Click "Services" in the menu frame.
Enter the required information in
"DNS Setup".
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
Click "DNS".
2
7
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
CONFIGURING LDAP SERVER SETTINGS (WHEN
USING AN LDAP SERVER)
If mail addresses are managed on your network by an LDAP server, the e-mail addresses stored in the LDAP server
can be used for Scan to E-mail.
In addition, user authentication can be enabled to restrict use of the network scanner function by means of user
passwords stored in the LDAP server. (p.17)
To allow the machine to use the e-mail addresses in the LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page.
Click "LDAP" in the menu frame.
1
Select "Enable" in the "LDAP Setup" menu.
2
Click "Submit".
3
Configure the settings in "Global
Address Books List".
4
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
5
8
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
PROGRAMMING CUSTOM INDEX NAMES
Stored destinations appear as one-touch keys in the Address book screen of the touch panel (p.19). Each stored
destination appears in the ABC (alphabetical) index, and can also be included in one of the six custom indexes (note
that these are called "group indexes" in the touch panel). To program names for the custom indexes, follow the steps
below.
• To change a previously programmed custom index name, simply overwrite the old name.
• To switch between the ABC index and the custom indexes in the Address book screen, see page 19.
Note
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu
frame.
1
1
Click "Custom Index".
2
Enter names for groups 1 to 6.
3
Six group indexes are available, and a name up
to six characters long can be assigned to each.
The names "USER 1" to "USER 6" are initially
entered. Change the names as needed.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
9
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION
To store the name and address of a destination in a one-touch key, click "Destination" in the Web page menu frame.
"Destination" can also be used to edit or clear stored destinations. (p.14)
A total of 200 destinations can be stored, including E-mail, FTP, Desktop, and Group destinations.
Stored destinations can be selected in the machine's touch panel when transmission is performed.
* Multiple e-mail addresses (up to 100) can be stored as a group. Note that this may reduce the maximum number
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.
E-mail:
FTP:
Desktop:
Group:
See below
Refer to page 11.
Refer to page 12.
Refer to page 13.
Click here.
Make sure that the address book screen (p.19) does not appear in the machine's touch panel when you store,
edit, or delete destinations. Destinations cannot be edited or deleted when the address book screen appears.
Note
Storing destinations for Scan to E-mail
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.
Enter the destination information.
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
Click "E-mail".
2
If user authentication is enabled and you wish
Note
to allow login using the above stored
information, select the "It adds also to the
Sender List." checkbox and enter the "Login
Name" (maximum of 32 characters). The login
name must be the same as the login name
stored in the LDAP server.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
To perform Scan to E-mail, the SMTP server settings must first be established. Click "Application" in the Web
page, click "SMTP" in the screen that appears, and then enter the settings under "SMTP Setup" (p.7).
Note
10
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing destinations for Scan to FTP
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.
If you select the "Enable Hyperlink to FTP
1
Note
server to be e-mailed" checkbox and select
a previously stored recipient (p.10) from
"E-mail Destination", an e-mail will be sent
to the recipient informing them of the file
format and location of the scanned image
data. A hyperlink to the file server to which
the scanned image data was sent appears
in the e-mail, and the recipient can click the
hyperlink to go directly to the location where
the image data is stored.
Click "FTP".
2
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
1
Enter the destination information.
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server
settings. Click "Application" in the menu frame and then click "DNS" or "WINS" in the page that appears to
configure the corresponding settings.
Note
To perform Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), you must also click "SMTP" and then enter the settings under "SMTP
Setup" for the SMTP server (p.7).
11
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing destinations for Scan to Desktop
The destination for Scan to Desktop is stored by the Sharp Network Scanner Tool Setup Wizard when "Network
Scanner Tool" is installed in your computer. For this reason, there is no need to store the Scan to Desktop
destination in the Web page. (The Network Scanner Tool is on the CD-ROM that accompanied the Network Scanner
Expansion Kit .)
For information on Scan to Desktop system requirements, installing the Network Scanner Tool, and storing the
destination, see the Users Guide for the Network Scanner Tool on the CD-ROM that accompanies the network
scanner expansion kit.
Normally your computer is stored as the destination by the method indicated above.
The following page for storing Scan to Desktop destination information appears when "Destination" is selected in the
menu frame, followed by "Desktop". This page is used by mainly by the system administrator in the following
circumstance.
• When another machine with the network scanner function has been added to the same network, and you wish to
perform Scan to Desktop from the added machine to a destination programmed in the previously existing machine.
Refer to "Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations" (p.14), and select the Scan to Desktop
destination information that you wish to transfer to the new machine. Enter the displayed information in the same
setting screen of the new machine. (When all information has been entered, click "Submit".)
If there are additional destinations that you want to transfer to the new machine, repeat this procedure for each
destination.
Note that if there are any discrepancies between the newly programmed information and the information in the host
computer, transmission and reception may not be possible.
• For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.
Note
• If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server
settings. Click "Application" in the menu frame and then click "DNS" or "WINS" in the page that appears to
configure the corresponding settings.
12
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing Groups (Scan to E-mail)
If you are using Scan to E-mail, a scanned image can be sent to multiple destinations in a single operation.
Up to 100 destinations can be stored in one group.
Note
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.
Enter the destination information.
1
2
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
1
Click "Group".
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
13
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations
To edit or delete programmed destinations, click "Destination" in the menu frame of the Web page.
Click "Destination" in the menu frame
of the Web page.
To edit the selected destination, click
"Edit" under the Destinations List.
1
2
3
The programming screen
of the destination
selected in step 2
appears. Edit the
information in the same
way as you initially stored
it.
When finished, be sure to click "Submit" to save
your changes.
In the Destinations List, click the
checkbox of the destination that you
want to edit or delete.
To delete the selected destination,
click "Delete" under the Destinations
List.
4
A message appears
asking you to confirm the
deletion. Click "Yes" to
delete.
If you attempt to edit or delete a programmed destination in the following situations, a warning message will
appear and editing/deletion will not be possible.
Note
• The destination that you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission.
• The destination is included in a group.
If the destination is being used for a current transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and
then edit or delete the destination. If the destination is included in a group, delete the destination from the group
and then edit or delete the destination.
14
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
STORING THE SENDER INFORMATION (Scan to E-mail)
Use this procedure to store the sender information (sender name and e-mail address) that appears when you send
an image by Scan to E-mail. Up to 200 senders can be stored (only one sender can be selected for a transmission).
The sender name appears in the recipient's e-mail program.
Click "Sender" in the menu frame.
Enter the sender information.
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu
frame.
1
Click "Add".
2
The sender programming
screen appears.
If user authentication is enabled and you wish to
allow login using the above stored information,
enter the login name for that information in "Login
Name" (maximum of 32 characters). The login
name must be the same as the login name stored
in the LDAP server.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
4
Editing and deleting programmed sender's information
Click "Sender" in the menu frame.
Click "Edit" or "Delete".
1
2
If you clicked "Edit", edit
the information in the
same way that you
initially programmed it
and then click "Add" to
save your changes. If
you clicked "Delete", a
message will appear
asking you to confirm the
deletion. Click "Yes" to
delete.
15
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE
WEB PAGE ("Passwords")
Passwords can be established to protect the settings and information stored in the Web page. Note that it is not
necessary to set passwords; the network scanner functionality can also be used without passwords.
A password can be set for the administrator and a password can be set for users. When the Web page is accessed
with the user password, the "Device Setup" and "Network Setup" settings cannot be configured.
Click "Passwords" in the menu frame.
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entered password is stored.
1
5
After setting the password, turn the machine
power off and then back on.
When a password is set, you will be prompted for the
password when you attempt to access a Web page
with protected settings. For the "User name", enter
"user" if you are accessing the page as a user, or
"admin" if you are accessing the page as an
administrator. For detailed information on setting
passwords, refer to "Help".
Select the "Enable Password
Protection of this Web Site"
checkbox.
2
Enter the current password in "Admin
Password".
3
4
When establishing a password for the first time,
enter "Sharp" in "Admin Password".
Be sure to enter "S" in upper case and
"harp" in lower case (passwords are case
Caution
sensitive).
Enter passwords in "User Password"
and "Admin Password".
A maximum of 7 characters and/or numbers can
be entered for each password (passwords are
case sensitive).
Be sure to enter the same password in "New
Password" as you did in "Confirm Password".
16
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
RESTRICTING USE OF THE NETWORK SCANNER
FUNCTION (USER AUTHENTICATION)
Use of the network scanner function can be restricted by means of user passwords stored in an LDAP server.
Settings required for user authentication
To implement user authentication, the following settings are required:
• Enable user authentication (step 3 on page 6)
• Configure LDAP server settings (p.8)
• Store login names (p.15)
Logging in when user authentication is enabled
To use the network scanner function when user authentication is enabled, you must first log in. Follow these steps:
Press the [SCAN] key on the operation panel.
The login screen will appear in the touch panel.
1
ON LI
1
PRINT
DATA
SCAN
FAX
DATA
LINE
DATA
If you will use the [SELECT FROM SENDER LIST] key, go to step 3.
Touch the [LOGIN NAME] key,
[E-MAIL ADDRESS] key.
Touch the [SELECT FROM SENDER
2
3
LIST] key.
A text entry screen will
The sender list screen
appears. When you
appear when each key is
touched. Enter the
LOGIN NAME, SENDER
NAME, and E-MAIL
ADDRESS. (Go to step
4.)
OK
USER AUTHENTICATION
LOGIN NAME
select your login name,
sender name and e-mail
address are entered.
SENDER NAME
:
SELECT FROM
SENDER LIST
E-MAIL ADDRESS
PASSWORD
Enter the password.
4
5
For the password, enter the user password that is stored in the server.
PASSWORD
CANCEL
OK
abc
ABC
AB/ab 12#$%
SPACE
Touch the [OK] key.
If the login name and password are valid, the initial screen (p.18) of scanner mode appears.
• To logout, press the [*] key. If audit mode is enabled, you will also log out of your account.
• To switch to a mode other than network scanner mode, you must log out.
Note
17
INITIAL SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE
The condition setting screen of scanner mode is displayed by pressing the [SCAN] key (refer to the operation
manual for copier) while the copy mode, print mode, fax mode, or job status screen appears in the touch panel.
If user authentication is enabled, the initial screen will appear after authentication. (p.17)
In the explanations that follow, it is assumed that the initial screen that appears after pressing the [SCAN] key is the
condition setting screen (shown below). If you have set the display to show the address book screen (following
page) when the [SCAN] key is pressed, touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS] key in the address book screen to
display the condition setting screen.
• The key operator program "DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS" can be used to set the display to show either the
condition setting screen (shown below) or the address book screen (following page) when the [SCAN] key is
pressed (refer to the key operator's guide).
Note
• For information on the parts of the machine and the operation panel that are used for network scanning, refer
to the operation manual for copier.
Condition settings screen
The display is initially set (factory setting) to show the following condition setting screen as the initial screen.
1
READY TO SEND.
AUTO
ADDRESS
BOOK
10
9
QUALITY
2
300dpi
RESOLUTION
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
3
4
5
TIFF-G4
8
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
7
ORIGINAL
6
1
2
6
Message display
Messages appear here to indicate the current
status of the machine.
Two-sided original and job build icon display
(p.24, 25)
Either icon appears when two-sided scanning or
job build scanning (when an RSPF is installed) is
selected after pressing the [ORIGINAL] key. The
icon can be touched to open a function selection
screen.
[ADDRESS BOOK] key (p.19)
This displays the address book screen (next page).
Touch this key when you wish to use a one-touch key
that has a destination (or group) programmed in it.
7
8
[ORIGINAL] key (p.24, 25, 26)
3
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key (p.22)
Touch this key to set the original size manually,
select two-sided scanning, or select job build
(when an RSPF is installed).
When performing Scan to E-mail broadcast
transmission, touch this key to check your selected
destinations. A list of the destinations will appear,
and you can delete any incorrect destinations.
[FILE FORMAT] key (p.29)
Touch this key to change the format of the image
file to be sent, or change the number of pages per
file. The selected format is highlighted at the top of
the key.
4
5
[ADDRESS ENTRY] key (p.22)
When performing Scan to E-mail, touch this key if
you wish to enter the e-mail address of the recipient
manually instead of using a one-touch key.
9
[RESOLUTION] key (p.28)
[SEND SETTINGS] key (p.30)
Touch this key to change the subject*, file name, or
sender* when sending a scanned image.
Touch this key to change the resolution setting for
the original to be scanned. The selected resolution
setting will be highlighted above the key.
* When using Scan to E-mail.
10
[QUALITY] key (p.27)
Touch this key to change the image quality and
density settings for scanning. The selected image
quality and density are highlighted at the top of the
key.
18
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Address book screen
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key in the condition setting screen (previous page) to display the screen shown below
at right.
6
Destinations stored using the Web page are grouped in indexes ( ) according to the letter entered in "Initial" for
1
each destination, and the name entered in "Display Name" is displayed in the one-touch key ( ).
1
2
3
4
READY TO SEND.
CONDITION
SETTINGS
TEST1
TEST2
TEST4
TEST6
TEST8
1/2
TEST3
TEST5
TEST7
ADDRESS REVIEW
6
1
GLOBAL
ADDRESS SEARCH
6
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
1
6
5
E-mail Destination Management page
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
ABC
GROUP
1
5
One-touch key display
[ABC
GROUP] key
This shows the one-touch keys that have been
stored on the selected "index card". The key type is
indicated by the icon at the right.
Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical
index and the group index. The selected index type
is displayed.
:Scan to E-mail
:Scan to FTP
:Scan to Desktop
6
Index keys
One-touch key destinations are stored on each of
these index cards (alphabetical index or group
index). Touch an index key to display the card.
Group indexes make it possible to store one-touch
keys by group with an assigned name for easy
reference. This is done with the custom settings
(p.9). Frequently used one-touch key destinations
can be stored on the [FREQUENT USE] card for
convenient access.
The number of one-touch keys that appear in one
screen can be changed to 6, 8, or 12 using "THE
NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS / SENDER
KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING" in the key operator
programs.
2
Display switching keys
In cases where the one-touch keys cannot all be
displayed on one screen, this shows how many
screens are left. Touch the "
move through the screens.
" "
" keys to
3
4
[CONDITION SETTINGS] key
This displays the condition setting screen (p.18),
which is used to set various conditions.
[GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key (p.23)
If an LDAP server is used, touch this key to select
a Scan to E-mail destination in the LDAP server. If
an LDAP server is not used, the key is grayed out
and cannot be selected.
• If the initial screen has been set to the address book screen in the key operator programs, the above screen
will be the initial screen.
Note
• If desired, you can use the key operator program, "DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS", to set the default screen
to the group index. (Refer to the key operator's guide.)
19
Chapter 2
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
2
SENDING AN IMAGE
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD
Make sure the machine is in scanner
mode.
Adjust the quality setting. (p.27)
1
4
The factory default
settings are:
When the [SCAN] key
AUTO
QUALITY
COPY
PRINT
SCAN
light is on, the machine is
in scanner mode. If the
light is not on, press the
[SCAN] key.
If user authentication is
enabled, you must log in.
(p.17)
• Image quality:
TEXT/PHOTO
• Density: AUTO
30
ON LI
DATA
RESOLON
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
DATA
Adjust the resolution setting. (p.28)
Load the original.
5
2
QUALITY
The factory default
setting is "300dpi".
For detailed information
on loading an original,
refer to the operation
manual for copier.
300dpi
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
8½X11
ORIGINAL
You cannot load documents in both the
RSPF and on the document glass and send
them in a single transmission. If documents
are loaded in both the RSPF and on the
document glass, only the document in the
RSPF will be scanned and transmitted.
Note
Select the file format. (p.29)
6
QUALITY
The factory default
settings are:
• FILE TYPE: TIFF
300dpi
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
•
COMPRESSION MODE:
MMR (G4)
Check the original size that appears in
the top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.
3
AUTO
X11
•
PAGES PER FILE: ALL
ORIGAL
300dpi
The original size is
automatically detected.
RESOLUTION
If you loaded a
non-standard size
document or wish to
change the scanning size,
touch the [ORIGINAL] key
and set the document
size. (Refer to page 26.)
TIFF-G4
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.
7
FILE FORMAT
The address book screen
appears.
AUTO
8½X11
ADDRESS
BOOK
ORIGINAL
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
•
•
To scan a two-sided original (when an RSPF
is installed), refer to page 24.
If you are scanning a large number of
originals (and the RSPF is installed), follow
the procedure on page 25.
Note
• To rotate the document image 90° before
transmission, see page 26.
20
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Using the RSPF
Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
8
Press the [START] key ( ).
10
The key you touched is
READY TO SEND.
highlighted. If you touch
the wrong key, touch the
key again to cancel the
selection. The key
display will return to
normal.
Scanning begins. When
scanning is finished,
"SENDING. PRESS [C]
TO CANCEL." appears in
the touch panel and
transmission begins.
When transmission is
finished, "SENDING
COMPLETED." appears
in the touch panel.
TEST1
TEST2
TEST4
TEST6
TEST8
EFGHI
TEST3
TEST5
TEST7
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
JKLMN
OP
• Refer to pages 10 to 13 for information on
programming one-touch key destinations.
• When touching a one-touch key,
corresponding information from the email
destination screen is shown in the
Note
Using the document glass
message display.
2
Press the [START] key ( ).
10
• The destination e-mail address for Scan to
E-mail can be entered manually, or you
can search for a destination in an LDAP
server on the network (p.22 to 23).
• Multiple destinations can be specified for
a Scan to E-mail transmission (p.22).
The original is scanned
and the [READ-END] key
appears.
Enter a file name for the scanned
image. (p.30)
9
If the send settings are
ADDRESS
BOOK
not changed, a file name
is assigned based on the
items specified in the
Web page.
If you have another page to scan,
11
change pages and then press the
[START] key ( ).
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been
scanned.
SEND SETTINGS
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning
automatically ends and transmission begins.
Note
When sending an image by Scan to E-mail,
a subject and sender's name can be
entered.
Note
Normally the subject and sender are
automatically entered based on the
information stored in "Reply E-mail Address"
in "SMTP Setup" in the Web page.
If user authentication is enabled, the e-mail
address of the user who logged in is used as
the sender.
After the final page is scanned, touch
12
the [READ-END] key.
"SENDING. PRESS [C]
ESS [START].
EAD-END].
TO CANCEL." appears in
the touch panel and
transmission begins.
When transmission is
finished, "SENDING
COMPLETED." appears
in the touch panel.
READ-END
• To cancel transmission while "SCANNING ORIGINAL." appears in the display or before the [READ-END] key
is touched, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ). If you press the [CLEAR] key ( ),
Note
the destination and scan settings are saved. To cancel a transmission, press the [JOB STATUS] key and
cancel the job. (p.31)
• If you exceed the number of pages that can be scanned while scanning an original, "THE MEMORY
BECOMES FULL." will appear in the touch panel. To send the data that has been scanned to that point, touch
the [SEND] key. To cancel the transmission, touch the [CANCEL] key.
• If a misfeed occurs while an original is being scanned, remove the original according to the instructions in the
touch panel. To resume scanning after removing the misfeed, press the [START] key (
).
21
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL
The destination for a Scan to E-mail transmission can be selected from the address book or entered manually. You
can also use an e-mail address stored on an LDAP server.
It is possible to select multiple destinations for a Scan to E-mail transmission using a combination of these methods.
Use the following procedure when you wish to enter the e-mail address manually or use an e-mail address stored on
an LDAP server.
Sending an image by entering an e-mail address manually
Perform steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.20)
If you wish to enter another e-mail
address, repeat steps 2 through 4.
1
2
5
If you wish to select an e-mail address from the
address book screen, follow steps 7 and 8 of
"BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.20 to 21).
If you wish to select an e-mail address in an
LDAP server, follow the steps in "Sending an
image by selecting an e-mail address in an LDAP
server" (p.23).
Touch the [ADDRESS ENTRY] key.
The e-mail address entry
screen appears.
ADDRESS
BOOK
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
If you frequently transmit to a fixed group of
destinations, you can store the destinations
as a group (p.13).
Note
Touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key
and check the destinations.
6
Touch the keys on the keyboard to
enter the e-mail address.
3
When the [ADDRESS
ADDRESS
E-MAIL ADDRESS
CANCEL
OK
REVIEW] key is touched,
BOOK
only the entered
destinations are displayed.
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
To delete a destination,
abc
ABC
touch the key of the
SEND SETTINGS
destination that you wish
to delete.
Touch the [OK] key to
return to the initial screen.
SPACE
AB/ab
12#$%
• If you make a mistake, touch the
cursor ( ) back to the mistake and then enter the
key to move the
correct character.
The entered or selected destinations appear in
• To enter a number, touch the [AB/ab
12#$%] key.
Note
the address review screen as one touch keys.
A maximum of 18 characters of the name or
e-mail address can appear in each key.
The screen will change to the number entry screen.
To return to the text entry screen, touch the [AB/ab
12#$%] key again.
Continue from step 9 of "BASIC
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.21).
Touch the [OK] key.
7
4
CANCEL
OK
To cancel the operation when selecting
destinations, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
Note
).
abc
ABC
•
Important points when using Scan to E-mail
Caution
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large. Your mail server's system administrator may
have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail transmission. If this limit is
exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to the recipient. Even if there is no limit and your e-mail is
successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden on the
recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection environment. If large image
data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other,
unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down. In
cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as lowering the resolution mode.
A limit can be set for the size of image files sent by Scan to E-mail in "Maximum Size of File" (p.6) in the Web page.
•
22
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Sending an image by selecting an e-mail address in an LDAP server
To use an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page.
Perform steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC
Touch the [OK] key.
1
2
5
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.20
)
The server begins searching.
When the search is finished, a list of the matching
e-mail addresses appears.
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.
If there are no matches, touch the [OK] key
in the message screen that appears. Touch
The address book screen
appears.
Note
ADDRESS
BOOK
the [SEARCH AGAIN] key and repeat the
procedure from step 4.
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
Touch the one-touch key of the
desired destination.
6
If you touch the wrong
READY TO SEND.
2
key, touch the correct key.
Touch the [GLOBAL ADDRESS
SEARCH] key.
3
ADD SELECTED
tes
test1
test3
test5
test2
test4
test6
The global address
search screen appears.
CONDITION
1/2
SETTINGS
ADDRESS REVIEW
GLOBAL
ADDRESS SEARCH
Touch the [ADD SELECTED] key.
7
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
The destination selected
No.001:test1
in step 6 is entered as a
destination of the
transmission.
If multiple LDAP servers have been
ADD SELECTED
Note
configured, the server select screen appears.
Touch the key of the server that you wish to
search and then touch the [OK] key.
tes
test1
test3
test5
test2
test4
test6
SERVER SELECT
SERVER 1
CANCEL
OK
1/2
SERVER 2
SERVER 3
SERVER 4
If you wish to enter another e-mail
address, repeat steps 6 through 7.
8
If multiple LDAP servers have been configured and
you wish to select a different server, touch the
[ADDRESS BOOK] key and then touch the
[GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key.
The selected server key is highlighted.
Touch the key of the server that you
wish to search and then touch the
[OK] key.
4
Touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key
and check the destinations.
When the [ADDRESS
9
GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH
CANCEL
OK
test
REVIEW] key is touched,
only the entered
CONDITION
SETTINGS
destinations are displayed.
ADDRESS REVIEW
To delete a destination,
touch the key of the
abc
ABC
SEARCH AGAIN
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
destination that you wish
ADDRESS BOOK
to delete.
Touch the [OK] key to
return to the initial screen.
• If you make a mistake, touch the
cursor ( ) back to the mistake and then enter the
correct character.
key to move the
• To enter a number, touch the [AB/ab
12#$%] key.
Continue from step 9 of "BASIC
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.21).
10
The screen will change to the number entry screen.
To return to the text entry screen, touch the [AB/ab
12#$%] key again.
To cancel the operation when selecting
Note
destinations, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
23
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED
ORIGINAL (when an RSPF is installed)
Follow these steps to automatically scan a two-sided original.
Make sure the machine is in scanner
mode and then load the document in
the RSPF. (p.20)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
2
4
You will return to the
initial screen.
INAL SIZE
MANUAL
OK
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
300dpi
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
A two-sided original icon appears next to the
[ORIGINAL] key.
AUTO
8½X11
ORIGINAL
(Example: The icon that appears when the
[2-SIDED BOOKLET] key is touched.)
QUALITY
300dpi
Touch the [2-SIDED BOOKLET] key or
the [2-SIDED TABLET] key as
appropriate for the original you
loaded.
3
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
8½X11
If you wish to rotate the
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL SIZE
original 90° when
AUTO
MANUAL
creating an image file,
touch the [ROTATE THE
IMAGE 90 DEGREES]
checkbox (a checkmark
should appear in the
box).
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
2-SIDED
TABLET
Continue from step 4 of "BASIC
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.20 to 21).
5
ROTATE THE
If the correct original size does not appear in
the screen of step 2, touch the [MANUAL]
key and specify the correct original size
(p.26).
Note
Note
• Booklets and tablets
Two-sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets, and two-sided
originals that are bound at the top are tablets.
Booklet
Tablet
• Two-sided scanning mode turns off after transmission is finished. Two-sided
scanning mode can also be canceled by pressing the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
).
24
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (when
an RSPF is installed)
If you have a large number of originals, the originals can be scanned in batches using the RSPF.
Make sure the machine is in scanner
mode and then load the document in
the RSPF. (p.20)
Perform steps 4 through 9 of "BASIC
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.20 to 21
1
2
5
6
)
Press the [START] key ( ).
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
Scanning of the originals
begins. A message
appears in the touch
panel.
300dpi
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
2
AUTO
8½X11
ORIGINAL
When all of the originals in the RSPF
have been scanned, load the next
batch and press the [START] key ( ).
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been
scanned.
7
8
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key.
3
If you wish to rotate the
original 90° when creating
an image file, touch the
[ROTATE THE IMAGE 90
DEGREES] checkbox (a
checkmark should appear
in the box).
RIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
OK
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning
automatically ends and transmission begins.
Note
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 EES
When all originals have been
scanned, touch the [READ-END] key.
"SENDING. PRESS [C]
If the correct original size does not appear in
the screen of step 2, touch the [MANUAL] key
and specify the correct original size (p.26).
Note
ESS [START].
EAD-END].
TO CANCEL." appears in
the touch panel and
transmission begins.
When transmission is
finished, "SENDING
COMPLETED." appears
in the touch panel.
Touch the [OK] key.
4
READ-END
You will return to the
initial screen.
NAL SIZE
OK
MANUAL
JOB
BUILD
2-SIDED
TABLET
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES
A job build icon appears next to the [ORIGINAL] key.
QUALITY
300dpi
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
8½X11
ORIGINAL
• Job build mode turns off after transmission is finished. Job build mode can also be canceled by pressing the
[CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
• When performing Scan to E-mail, see the notes on page 22.
Note
25
SCANNING SETTINGS
(ORIGINAL SIZE, QUALITY, RESOLUTION,
FILE FORMAT, AND SEND SETTING)
When sending an image, you can change the original scan size, quality, resolution, file format, and file name.
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE
If you load an original that is not a standard size, or if you wish to change the scanning size, touch the [ORIGINAL]
key and set the original size manually.
Perform the following steps after loading the document in the RSPF or on the document glass.
*Standard sizes:
The following originals sizes will be correctly detected:
Note
• Countries/regions that use inch-based standard sizes:11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R,
5-1/2"x8-1/2", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R*.
• Countries/regions that use AB standard sizes: A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R*, B4, B5, B5R.
* These sizes can only be automatically detected when the RSPF is used.
If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed, or
the original size may not appear.
If you wish to select an AB size, touch
the [AB INCH] key and then touch
the desired original size key.
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
1
300dpi
RESOLUTION
[AB] is highlighted and
AB size keys are
displayed. To return to
the inch size, touch the
[AB INCH] key once
again.
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
OK
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
OK
A5
A5R
A4
B5
AUTO
8½X11
B5R
B4
A4R
AB
INCH
ORIGINAL
Touch the outer [OK] key.
4
Touch the [MANUAL] key.
2
You will return to the
initial screen.
Touching the inner [OK]
key in the step above
returns you to step 2.
The sizes that can be
selected are displayed.
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
INAL SIZE
MANUAL
OK
OK
O
A4
5R
B5
JOB
BUIL
DED
LET
2-S
TABLET
4
3
A4R
AB
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 D
INCH
•
If you wish to rotate the original 90° when
Note
creating an image file, touch the [ROTATE
THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES] checkbox (a
checkmark should appear in the box).
The selected size appears in the top
5
half of the [ORIGINAL] key.
300dpi
• The [2-SIDED] key and [JOB BUILD] key
do not appear on models that do not have
an RSPF installed.
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
Touch the desired original size key.
A4
3
ORIGINAL
[AUTO] is no longer
highlighted. [MANUAL]
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
OK
OK
and the original size key
you touched are
highlighted.
AUTO
You can return to automatic detection by
pressing the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Note
1
1
/
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
52X82
52X82R
82X11
1
1
1
/
/
/
82X11R
82X13
84
AB
11X17
INCH
26
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SELECTING THE QUALITY
You can adjust the quality manually to match the type of original. After loading the original in scanner mode, follow
the steps below. The factory default settings are "TEXT/PHOTO" for the image quality, and "AUTO" for the density.
Touch the [QUALITY] key.
Adjust the density.
1
4
OK
Touch the
to adjust the scanning
density. (Touch the
or
key
AUTO
QUALITY
AUTO
MANUAL
30
key for a darker image or
RESOLUTION
the
image.)
key for a lighter
1
3
5
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
Selecting the original type.
Touch the [OK] key.
2
5
2
Touch the appropriate
You will return to the
initial screen.
ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE
OK
key for the type of
original to be scanned.
The image will be
processed according to
the selected type.
You can select the
original type from
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AUTO
MANUAL
1
·
1
3
5
"TEXT", "TEXT/PHOTO"
or "PHOTO".
TEXT ( ) : Text original
TEXT/PHOTO ( ) : Original with mixed text and photos.
PHOTO ( ) : Photograph or illustration
Touch the [AUTO MANUAL] key.
3
OK
"MANUAL" is highlighted.
AUTO
MANUAL
1
3
5
27
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution for scanning an original can be selected. Load the original in scanner mode and then follow the steps
below. The factory default setting for the resolution is "300 dpi".
Change the resolution
Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.
1
QUALITY
300dpi
RESOLUTION
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
8½X11
ORIGINAL
Touch the desired resolution key.
2
Touch the resolution key
that is most suitable for
200dpi
the original.
300dpi
The selected key will be
highlighted.
600dpi
Touch the [OK] key.
3
You will return to the
initial screen.
OK
200dpi
300dpi
600dpi
• The resolution is initially set to 300 dpi (factory default setting). A resolution of 200 dpi or 300 dpi produces
sufficiently clear image data for normal text originals. (200 dpi is equivalent to the "Fine" character mode used
for facsimiles).
Note
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as a
photograph or an illustration. Note that a high resolution setting will result in a larger file size, and transmission
may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the image is sent (or if the
administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful, you can try such
measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size setting for the original
("MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE" (p.26)).
• The default resolution setting can be changed in the key operator programs. (See "INITIAL RESOLUTION
SETTING" in the key operator's guide.)
• The resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
28
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT
You can select the format of the image file that will be created (file type, compression mode, and pages per file). The
factory default settings are "TIFF" for the file type, "MMR (G4)" for the compression mode, and "ALL" for the pages
per file.
Touch the [FILE FORMAT] key.
• The factory default setting can be
1
Note
changed in the key operator programs.
(See "INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING"
in the key operator's guide.)
QUALITY
300dpi
RESOLUTION
• To open the scanned image without using
the software program in the CD-ROM that
accompanies the network scanner
expansion kit, the recipient must have a
viewer program that can open the image
format (file type) that was selected as
explained above.
TIFF-G4
FILE FORMAT
AUTO
X11
ORIGL
• The factory default setting for the image
format produces the smallest file (TIFF
G4). If the recipient cannot open the
image, try sending the image in a different
format.
• If the number of scanned originals is not
divisible by the number set in "PAGES
PER FILE", the last file will have less
pages.
2
Select the file type and the
compression mode.
Either [TIFF] or [PDF] can be selected for the file
type of the image data to be created, and
[NONE], [MH (G3)] or [MMR (G4)] can be
selected for the compression format.
2
Set the number of pages per file.
3
FILE TYPE
PDF
OK
QUALITY
300dpi
TIFF
MH (G3)
2
COMPRESSION MODE
NONE
RESOLUTION
MMR (G4)
4
FILE FORMAT
PAGES PER FILE
AUTO
8½X11
ALL
1
3
5
6
ORIGINAL
Touch the "ALL" key or one of keys [1] to [6].
• [ALL]: The scanned images are combined into a
single file.
• [1] to [6]: Multiple image files are created, each with
the selected number of pages per file.
Touch the [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
initial screen.
OK
MMR (G4)
29
HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
CHANGING THE SEND SETTINGS
The file name of the scanned image can be changed.
When performing Scan to E-mail, the subject and sender can also be changed.
If the send settings are not changed, these items are entered automatically using the information stored in the Web
page.
Touch the [SEND SETTINGS] key.
If [SENDER] is touched, a sender
selection screen will appear. Touch
the desired one-touch key and then
touch the [OK] key.
1
4
ADDRESS
BOOK
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
The [GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key is used
to select a user stored in a global address book
as a sender. (p.23)
The [ADDRESS ENTRY] key is used to directly
enter an e-mail address.
Touch the [SUBJECT], [FILE NAME],
or [SENDER] key to change the
corresponding entry.
2
If the [Enable User
SEND SETTINGS
Authentication] or
(USE DEF
SUBJECT
[Disable selection of
sender from Sender List]
checkbox is selected in
"Advanced Setup" in
"Network Scanning" in
the Web page, the
[SENDER] key will be
grayed out and cannot be
selected (p.6).
• The senders that have been stored in
(USE DEF
(USE DEF
FILE E
SENDER
Note
"Sender" in the Web page appear in the
sender select screen. If the desired
sender does not appear, you must first
store it as a Scan to E-mail destination in
"Sender" in the Web page. (p.15)
• When a checkmark appears in the
[Disable selection of sender.] checkbox in
the Web page, the [SENDER] key in the
"SEND SETTING" screen is grayed out to
prevent selection of senders and entry of
e-mail addresses.
If the [SUBJECT] key or [FILE NAME]
key is touched, a keyboard will
appear. Enter the desired text and
then touch the [OK] key.
3
• If an LDAP server is not configured in the
Web page, the [GLOBAL ADDRESS
SEARCH] key will be grayed out and
searching will not be possible.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
SUBJECT
CANCEL
OK
XXXX
Touch the [OK] key in the send
settings screen.
5
You will return to the
initial screen.
OK
abc
ABC
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
• A maximum of only 54 characters can be
displayed in the send settings screen.
• When entering a file name, there is no
need to enter a file extension.
Note
The file extension is added automatically
based on the selected file format.
30
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP
TRANSMISSION
You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress. Cancellation is done from the scanner job status screen.
You can cancel a transmission after scanning is finished by pressing the [CLEAR] key (
key ( ) while "SENDING. PRESS [C] TO CANCEL." appears in the touch key.
) or the [CLEAR ALL]
Note
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
1
LINE
DATA
FAX
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
2
Touch the [E-MAIL/FTP] key.
2
E-MAIL/FTP
Touch the job key of the transmission
job that you wish to cancel.
The touched key is highlighted.
3
4
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.
A message appears to
confirm the cancellation.
Touch the [YES] key to
delete the selected job
STOP/DELETE
key and cancel the
transmission.
If you do not wish to cancel the
transmission, touch the [NO] key.
Note
31
Chapter 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a problem or question arises, try to solve the situation using the following information before contacting your
authorized SHARP dealer.
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The original is loaded upside down.
→ If you are using the document glass, the original must be placed
face down. If you are using the RSPF, the original must be
inserted face up.
The image cannot be scanned.
20
A slight amount of moiré sometimes appears when
printed matter is scanned.
→ Moiré can in some cases be reduced by changing the scanning
resolution.
A moiré (stripe pattern) appears on
the scanned image.
28
—
If you are using the document glass, also try shifting the position
and/or angle of the original on the document glass.
The document glass or the underside of the RSPF (or
document cover) is dirty.
→ To clean the document glass and the underside of the document
cover, see operation manual for copier.
The scanned image is fuzzy or has
smudges.
The set original scanning size is smaller than the actual
original size.
→ Set the actual original size.
If you intentionally selected a size setting smaller than the actual
original size, take into consideration the part of the original that
you wish to scan when placing the original. For example, if the
actual size is 8-1/2" x 11" and you selected 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" for the
size setting, place the original so that the part that you wish to
scan is within the 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" area indicated by the guides on
the far left side of the document glass.
The scanned image is clipped.
26
26
The original was not placed in the correct orientation.
→ Place the original in the correct orientation. (See operation
manual for copier)
The scanned image is upside down
or on its side.
To rotate the image 90 degrees, touch the [ORIGINAL] key in the
initial screen and then touch the "ROTATE THE IMAGE 90
DEGREES" checkbox to make a checkmark appear.
The viewer program used by the recipient does not
support the format of the received image data.
→ Try selecting a different file type (TIFF or PDF) and/or a different
compression format (NONE, MH (G3), MMR (G4)) when sending
the image data.
The received image data cannot be
opened.
29
—
Otherwise, have the recipient use Sharpdesk or a viewer
program that supports the above combinations of file types and
compression formats.
The first file may still remain in the cache of the file server
client. Disable use of the cache in the client software.
When the same file name is used for
two successive Scan to FTP
transmissions, the second file is not
sent.
32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page
Problem
Cause and solution
An incorrect destination was selected.
Otherwise, there is a mistake in the information stored
for the destination (e-mail address or FTP server
information).
→ Select the correct destination and make sure the correct
information is stored for the destination.
The recipient does not receive
transmitted data.
10 - 13
* If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail) is unsuccessful, an
error message such as "Undelivered Message" may be
sent to the designated administrator's e-mail address.
This information may help you determine the cause of
the problem.
Check the Web page to see if a limit has been set for the size
of image files sent using Scan to E-mail (the factory default
setting is "Unlimited").
6
A limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB. Consult the
administrator of the Web page to select a suitable limit.
3
The amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail
transmission is sometimes limited by the administrator of the
mail server. Even if the amount of data sent is within the limit
setting explained above, if it exceeds the limit set by the
administrator of the mail server, the data will not be delivered
to the recipient.
Decrease the amount of data sent in the e-mail transmission
(reduce the number of pages scanned). (Ask your mail server
administrator what the data limit is for one e-mail transmission.)
The recipient does not receive data
sent by e-mail (Scan to E-mail).
—
—
When there is a large amount of image information, the data
file is also large and transmission takes a long time.
Transmission takes a long time.
In order to select image quality and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose
of transmission and create image data that is well-balanced in terms of image quality and file
size, pay attention to the following points:
Caution
• Image quality modes (TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO, PHOTO)
The factory default setting is "TEXT/PHOTO". If the original does not contain photographs, illustrations, or
other halftone images, "TEXT" mode will give you the most workable scanned image. "TEXT/PHOTO" should
only be selected when the original includes a photograph and you wish to give priority to the quality of the
photograph. (There is no advantage to scanning a text-only original in "TEXT/PHOTO" or "PHOTO" mode.)
"PHOTO" mode should only be used to scan a photograph or illustration. Note that this will produce a larger file
size than the other modes.
• Resolution
The factory default setting is "300 dpi". This is suitable for originals with mixed text and
illustrations/photographs; however, it produces a slightly larger file size. For normal text originals, a resolution
setting of 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently readable. (200 dpi is equivalent to the "Fine" resolution
setting of fax machines.)
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as an
original that includes photographs or illustrations. Note that a high-resolution setting will result in a larger file
size and transmission may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the
image is sent (or if the administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful,
you can try such measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size
setting for the original.
DISPLAY MESSAGES
If one of the following messages appears in the display, promptly take action as instructed by the message.
Message
Solution
Page
THE DOCUMENT FEEDER IS
DISABLED.
Use of the RSPF has been disabled in the key operator programs.
Use the document glass.
—
33
TROUBLESHOOTING
Message
Solution
Page
YOUR FILENAME IS WRONG.
The characters ¥/;:*?"<> cannot be used in a file name. Select a
name that does not use those characters.
—
NO MATCHING ADDRESS
FOUND.
PRESS [OK] THEN [SEARCH
AGAIN].
There are no addresses in the LDAP server that match your search
text. Select a different server or change the search text.
23
7
UNABLE TO ACCESS THE
SERVER.
CHECK SERVER ADDRESS ON
DEVICE WEB PAGE.
The server settings are not configured correctly. Check the server
settings.
THE ADDRESS LIMIT HAS
BEEN REACHED.
NO MORE ADDRESSES CAN BE 100 destinations.
ENTERED.
The maximum number of destinations that can be selected for a
single Scan to E-mail transmission is 100. Do not select more than
—
—
THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL. The memory became full while scanning the originals. If you wish to
SCANNED DATA IS
TRANSMITTED.
send just the originals that were scanned, touch the [SEND] key. If
you wish to cancel the entire transmission, touch the [CANCEL]
key.
NO RESPONSE FROM SERVER. The scanned image was not sent because the server was busy or
COMMUNICATION
TERMINATED DUE TO
TIMEOUT.
there was too much traffic. Wait briefly and then try again.
—
NETWORK ERROR
The scanned image was not sent because the directory of the
THE DIRECTORY NAME OF FTP destination FTP server was not correct. Make sure that the correct
11
SERVER IS INVALID.
FTP server information is configured in the Web page.
SERVER ACCESS DENIED.
CHECK ACCOUNT
The scanned image was not sent because a connection to the
server could not be established. Make sure that the SMTP server
7
INFORMATION ON DEVICE WEB settings or FTP server settings in the Web page are correct.
PAGE.
Make sure that your login name and password are correct.
—
NETWORK ERROR. (
CONSULT YOUR KEY
OPERATOR OR SYSTEM
ADMIN. FOR SPECIFIC
INFORMATION.
)
Turn off the power and turn it back on. Consult with your network
administrator to make sure that no problems exist on the network or
in the server. If the error is not cleared after turning the power off
and on, write down the 2-digit main code and 2-digit sub-code, turn
off the power, and contact your dealer.
—
Error codes
If a transmission error occurs when you send a scanned image, a message informing you of the error and an error
code will appear in the touch panel on the machine.
Error Code Table
Error Code
CE-01
Description of the Error
An interface hardware error has occurred.
CE-03
The server was down during the scanning of the original.
An error other than the above has occurred.
CE-00
IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED
If a Scan to E-mail is not successfully transmitted, an e-mail informing you of this fact is sent to the sender selected
at the time of transmission. If this happens, read the e-mail and determine the cause of the error, and then repeat
the transmission.
34
TROUBLESHOOTING
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO E-MAIL
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large.
Your mail server's system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail
transmission. If this limit is exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to the recipient. Even if there is no limit and
your e-mail is successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden
on the recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection environment.
If large image data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other,
unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down.
The images on the following page will produce the following file sizes when scanned as 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size
originals:
File size of text original A when scanned
in "TEXT" mode.
File size of photo original B when
scanned in "TEXT/PHOTO" mode.
Resolution
300dpi
600dpi
Approx. 50 KB
Approx. 90 KB
Approx. 1400 KB
Approx. 5000 KB
3
* If multiple images are scanned, the file size will be approximately (Size of each image as indicated above) x
(Number of images scanned).
Although the actual limitation depends on your network environment, a general guideline for the maximum file size
for Scan to E-mail is 2000 KB. In cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as lowering
the resolution mode.
Original image samples
The original images shown below are samples to help you understand the above explanations. Note that these
images are smaller than the actual originals (the actual originals are 8-1/2" x 11" size).
Text original A
Photo original B
35
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS
To check the IP address of the machine, print out the settings list from the operation panel of the machine.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
1
The custom settings
screen will appear.
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
Touch the [LIST PRINT] key.
2
LAY
AST
CL
LIST PRINT
FA
F
ESS
ROL
RECEMODE
Touch the [PRINTER TEST PAGE] key.
3
PRINTER TEST PAGE
FAX ORT
Touch the [PRINTER SETTING LIST]
key.
4
"PRINT JOB IN
MEMORY. PLEASE
PRINTER
SETTINGS LIST
PCL SYMBO
SET LIST
WAIT UNTIL PRINT
OUT." appears in the
message screen and
printing begins.
PCL EXTD
FONT L
NIC PAGE
If the [NIC PAGE] key does not appear,
touch the key to show the next screen.
Note
36
Chapter 4
METADATA DELIVERY
4
METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)
When the application integration module is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption
server, a sophisticated document solution environment can be built.
Scan to
Desktop
Metadata
(XML file)
Client PC that uses Network
Scanner Tool
Fax server, document
management software,
workflow application,
encryption server, etc.
Server
Image file
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Using the application integration module, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel
and transmitted along with the image as an XML file.
37
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)
To configure metadata settings, click [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu frame.
Storing Metadata Sets
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10
metadata items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of
transmission.
Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected
Note
as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, and/or a global
address book search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission
destinations.)
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name
on the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party
software application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by
means of the file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [SEND SETTINGS], to ensure
that a previously existing file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to
configure the file name so that name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the
date, etc.) in the generated file name. If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a
file name that is unique.)
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the
Note
Network Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.
• For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application
integration module, see the separate "Sharpdesk licence kit" manual.
• Using third party software applications
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from
Network Scanner Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network
Scanner Tool will start the application with the ".exe" command using the file name as a parameter. Normally
an application is started twice, once for the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network
Scanner Tool is set to start the application "APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files
"IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
38
TRANSMITTING METADATA
Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.
Installing Acrobat Reader
Touch the [DATA ENTRY] key.
Touch the key of the value that you
wish to enter.
1
5
CANCEL
6
OK
ADDRESS
ADDRES
3
DIRECT ENTRY
1/9
Value2
Value4
Value6
DATA ENTRY
SEND S
If no metadata sets have been stored, the
[DATA ENTRY] key cannot be selected.
Store a metadata set in the Web pages and
then perform the transmission procedure.
• If the entry values of the metadata item were stored
in selection format, the selections will appear as
keys. If a value is editable, the [DIRECT ENTRY] key
can be touched to manually enter a value.
• If a metadata item requires the entry of text, a text
entry screen will appear. Enter the required
information.
4
Note
Touch the key of the metadata that
you wish to use.
2
3
• To change the number of items that
CANCEL
OK
Note
appear at once, touch the display item
number select key. Each time the key is
touched, the number of items displayed
switches between 3 and 6.
1/2
METADATA 2
METADATA 4
METADATA 6
METADATA 8
Touch the [OK] key.
6
Touch the [OK] key.
CANCEL
6
OK
CANCEL
OK
3
DIRECT
1/9
/2
ADATA 2
ADATA 4
ADATA 6
ADATA 8
Value2
Value4
Enter all items.
7
The keys of the items stored in the
metadata set will appear. Touch the
key of the item that you wish to enter.
4
READY TO SEND
.
(METADATA SEND MODE)
METADATA SET
DATA ENTRY
READY TO SEND
.
(METADATA SEND MODE)
Value2
User ID
Pass Code
Bill Code
METADATA SET
DATA ENTRY
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
User ID
Pass
Bill Code
If you selected the wrong metadata set,
touch the [METADATA SET] key and return
to the screen of step 3. Metadata items
entered to that point will not longer be
effective.
Note
39
METADATA DELIVERY
Touch the [OK] key.
Select image settings and any other
settings, and perform the scan send
procedure.
8
9
READY TO SEND
.
ATA SET
CANCEL
OK
1/4
AUTO
ADDRESS
BOOK
QUALITY
200dpi
RESOLUTION
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS ENTRY
PDF-NONE
FILE FORMAT
A3
DATA ENTRY
SEND SETTINGS
ORIGINAL
• The procedures for selecting settings and performing
transmission are the same as for scan send.
• To change an entered value, touch the [DATA ENTRY] key
again. The entry screen for the selected metadata set will
appear.
• When metadata send settings are configured, the [DATA ENTRY] key is highlighted. If you do not wish to send
metadata, cancel the metadata settings and then perform the transmission
• When a destination or metadata setting has been selected in data entry mode, it will not be possible to switch
to another mode.
Note
40
METADATA DELIVERY
METADATA FIELDS
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
● Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are
automatically stored on your computer.
● Previously defined fields:
These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable,
and can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web
pages.
● User defined fields:
Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are
selectable and can be defined in the Web pages.
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
Name entered in
metadata field
Description
Where entered
4
fromName
Name of the user who sent the job. If the name is [SENDER NAME]
not entered as metadata, the sender name
determined by the usual rules for determining the
sender name will be applied as metadata.
(Sender name of selected sender)
senderName
E-mail address to which the transmission result
will be sent.
[SENDER NAME]
(E-mail address of selected sender)
documentSubject
Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject" line, [SUBJECT]
or job name on the fax cover sheet. When the
user enters a [SUBJECT] in the send settings
screen in the touch panel, the entered value is
applied as metadata.
(Blank until a value is set in the send
settings screen.)
fileName
Enter the file name of the image to be sent.
[FILE NAME]
(Only when the [Allow Custom
Filenames] checkbox is selected
in the metadata settings screen in
the Web pages.)
(Blank until a value is set in the send
settings screen.)
41
Chapter 5
SPECIFICATIONS
5
For information on power requirements, power consumption, dimensions, weight, and other specifications that are
common to all features of the machine, refer to the operation manual for copier.
Maximum original size
Optical resolution
Output resolution
Output modes
11" x 17" or A3
400dpi
200, 300, 600dpi
1bit/pixel
Halftone processing
File format
Error dispersion (200/300/600dpi)
File type: TIFF/PDF
Compression mode: MH (G3)/MMR (G4)/NONE
File creation method
Two-sided originals
Scan destinations
One file for all pages/One file per each 1 to 6 pages
Possible (when an RSPF is installed)
Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to E-mail
Supported client PC operating systems (for
Scan to Desktop function)
Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 6 or later),
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003
Web browser
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later
Uses built-in Web server
Management system
Network protocol
TCP/IP, SMTP, LDAP, FTP
Mail servers supporting SMTP
10Base-T/100Base-TX
Supported mail system
LAN connectivity
Number of destinations
200 maximum
Number of destinations for Scan To E-mail
broadcast transmission
100 maximum*
* Multiple e-mail addresses (up to 100) can be stored as a group. Note that this may reduce the maximum number
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
Scanning margins
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)
When scanning an original, the area indicated in the
following diagram cannot be scanned.
Area that can
be scanned
Scan size
setting
Scanning
margins
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)
Scan size
setting
42
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1163.
www.sharpusa.com
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink
to help protect the environment.
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper
PRINTED IN CHINA
2007B
KS1
TINSE1681QSZZ
Introduction
This manual describes the printer function of the AR-M256/M257/M258/M316/M317/M318 digital multifunctional system.
●
For information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral devices, and other
Note
copier-related information, please refer to your operation manual for copier.
The machine's default settings and default settings for the printer function can be changed using the key operator programs. For
●
more information, see the key operator's guide.
Where "AR-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model for "XXXX". For the name of your model,
●
see "PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the operation manual for copier.
This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the "RSPF".
●
®
®
●
The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows XP in Windows environments, and Mac
OS X v10.2 in Macintosh environments. The screens may vary in other versions of the operating systems.
For information on using your operating system, refer to your operating system's manual or online Help.
The PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) mentioned in this manual is option.
●
●
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product
improvements and modifications.
2
How to use the online manual
This section explains how to view the online manual. Please read this section before using the online manual.
For information on using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader Help.
How to Control the Online Manual
Following Links
In this manual, the following buttons are displayed at the bottom
of each page. Click these buttons to move quickly to pages that
you wish to view.
This manual uses a link function that allows you to jump to a
related page. If you click green, underlined text, the related
page will be displayed. (In the Contents section, the linked
areas are not underlined.)
To return to the previous page, click the button on the menu
bar of Acrobat Reader.
CONTENTS
Displays the Contents of this manual. Click on a topic in the
Contents to jump directly to that section.
Using Bookmarks
Bookmarks have been created on the left side of this manual.
You can click on a bookmark to jump directly to that section.
Takes you forward page by page.
Takes you back page by page.
How to Print Out This Manual
To print this manual, select "Print" from the "File" menu of
Acrobat Reader. Select the desired printer settings in the "Print"
dialog box, and then click the "OK" button.
3
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
(part 1)
1
The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
Make sure that the ON LINE indicator on the
operation panel is lit.
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
1
3
4
menu.
If the ON LINE indicator is not
The "Print" dialog box will appear.
COPY
on, press the [PRINT] key to
Make sure that "SHARP AR-XXXX" is selected
as the printer. If you need to change any print
settings, click the "Preferences" button
("Properties" button in Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0)
to open the printer driver setup screen.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
ON LINE
DATA
switch to printer mode and then
touch the [ONLINE] key.
PRINT
SCAN
DATA
The status of the printer function is indicated by the ON
LINE and DATA indicators next to the [PRINT] key.
ON LINE indicator
DATA indicator
There is print data in
memory that has not
been printed yet.
The machine is online
and ready to print.
Lit
The machine is
printing.
Blinking
Off
—
Windows 2000 does not have the "Preferences" button
in this dialog box. Select settings as needed on each of
the tabs in the setup screen.
The machine is offline The machine is not
and not ready to print. printing.
Start WordPad and open the document that you
wish to print.
2
7
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
(part 2)
1
When "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select"
Click the "Print" button ("OK" button in
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0).
5
If "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select" in the "Paper" tab of
the printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for
a print job is not loaded in the machine, the printing procedure
will vary depending on the "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT"
setting in the key operator programs (see the key operator's
guide).
Printing begins. The print job is delivered to one of the
following trays (depending on which output devices are
installed):
Job separator tray kit is installed: Upper tray
Finisher is installed: Center tray
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear in the touch panel.
Press the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key, load paper in the bypass tray, and then
touch the [BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
●
●
●
The output tray can be selected in the key operator
Note
programs (see "OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key
operator's guide).
●
The output tray can also be selected in the print
settings at the time of printing. To change the tray
selection, select the desired tray in "Output" in the
"Paper" tab of the printer driver setup screen.
Printing can be canceled in the job status screen.
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is enabled
Printing will take place using a size of paper that is close to the
size of the print image.
●
●
If the paper is loaded in a different orientation than the
Note
print image, the image is automatically rotated to match
If the paper type setting in the printer driver is different
from the bypass tray's paper type setting in the
machine, printing may stop. To resume printing, press
the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key in the touch panel, and specify
the same paper type as in the printer driver.
the paper. This setting can be changed in the key
operator programs (see "ROTATED PRINT" in the key
operator's guide).
8
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
When the "Paper Selection" setting is "Paper Source" or "Paper Type"
When "Paper Selection" in the "Paper" tab of the printer driver
setup screen is set to:
(part 3)
1
If you selected the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" in the printer
driver setup screen but there is no paper in the trays that
matches your selection, printing will take place as follows:
●
"Paper Source", select the tray that you wish to use for
printing from the pull-down menu.
"Paper Type", select the type of paper that you wish to use
for printing from the pull-down menu.
You selected a tray in "Paper Source", but the size
of the paper in the selected tray does not match
the printing size.
●
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the paper in the selected tray.
You selected a "Paper Type", and although the
selected type of paper is loaded in the machine, its
size does not match the printing size.
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the selected paper type.
However, if "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled,
printing will not take place.
"Paper Source" and "Paper Type" cannot be
simultaneously selected.
Note
The size and type of paper loaded in each tray and whether or
not the paper loaded in each tray can be used for printing are
specified in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings.
(See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for
copier.)
If you wish to select the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" when
printing, be sure to select these settings in the "Configuration"
tab of the printer driver setup screen. (See "CONFIGURING
THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
You selected a "Paper Type", but the selected type
of paper is not loaded in the machine.
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear. Press the [PRINT] key on
the operation panel, touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key, load the
correct size and type of paper in the bypass tray, and then
touch the [BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
9
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
Auditing mode
When "AUDITING MODE" is enabled in the key operator
programs, a 5-digit account number must be entered in the
printer driver setup screen in order to print. Account numbers
are stored in the key operator programs. (See "ACCOUNT
CONTROL" in the key operator's guide.)
(part 4)
1
To have the job control screen automatically appear
Note
each time you open the printer driver to print, select the
"Auto Job Control review" checkbox in the "Main" tab of
the printer driver setup screen.
●
If "CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS" is
To open the account number entry screen, click the "Job
Control" button in the "Main" tab of the printer driver.
Caution
enabled in the key operator programs and printing is
attempted without entering an account number, or an
invalid account number is entered, printing will not take
place. To allow printing without the entry of a valid
account number, disable "CANCEL JOBS OF
INVALID ACCOUNTS". In this case, the number of
pages printed is added to the [OTHERS] count.
If the machine's PPD file is used with the Windows
●
Enter your 5-digit account number in "Account Number" and
click the "OK" button.
standard PS printer driver, auditing mode will be
disabled and print counts will not be kept for each
account.
About the "No Offset" function setting
If the "No Offset" checkbox is selected in the "Main" tab of the printer driver setup screen, offset output will be prohibited regardless
of the setting of "OFFSET FUNCTION SETTING" in the key operator programs.
When stapling is performed (a setting other than "None" is selected in "Staple" in the "Main" tab), "No Offset" is automatically
enabled and the offset function cannot be used.
10
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Opening the printer driver from the "start" button
1
Printer driver settings can be configured by opening the printer driver from the Windows "start" button. Settings adjusted in this way
will be the initial settings when you print from an application. (If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time
of printing, the settings will revert to the initial settings when you quit the application.)
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings" and
then click "Printers".
1
1
2
Panel".
●
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button and select "Settings".
●
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
In Windows Server 2003, click the "Start" button and
then click "Printers and Faxes". Go to step 3.
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then
click "Printers and Faxes".
In Windows 2000, click "Printers".
2
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
3
In Windows NT 4.0, select "Document Defaults" to open
the printer driver setup screen.
Note
In Windows 98/Me, click the "Setup" tab.
3
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
Click the "Printing Preferences" button in the
"General" tab.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
4
11
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printer driver settings
1
To view Help for a setting, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the window and then click the setting.
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen. When a restriction is
in effect, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction.
1
6
7
8
Tab
Checkbox
The settings are grouped
on tabs. Click on a tab to
bring it to the front.
Check button
Allows you to select one
item from a list of options.
Print setting image
This shows the effect of the
selected print settings.
Drop-down list
Allows you to make a
selection from a list of
choices.
Click on a checkbox to
activate or deactivate a
function.
1
2
3
"OK" button
2
3
4
Click this button to save
your settings and exit the
dialog box.
"Cancel" button
Click this button to exit the
dialog box without making
any changes to the
settings.
4
5
9
"Apply" button
Click to save your settings
without closing the dialog box.
5
Machine image
This shows:
●
6
7
Windows NT 4.0 does not
●
The paper tray (in blue)
have the "Apply" button.
The "Apply" button does
selected in "Paper selection"
on the "Paper" tab.
The output tray (in green)
●
8
not appear when you
open this window from an
application.
●
9
selected in "Output" on the
"Paper" tab.
You can also click on a tray
to select it.
10
10
"Help" button
The settings and the image of the machine will vary
depending on the model.
Click this button to display
the help file for the printer
driver.
Note
12
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM WiIdNDOeWSd printing
(part 1)
1
This feature allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Sided (Book)" or
"2-Sided (Tablet)" from "Document Style" in the "Main" tab.
●
Paper sizes that can be used for two-sided printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, and
Foolscap.
Paper types that can be used for two-sided printing are Plain, Letter Head*, Recycled and Color.
* The use of Letter Head paper for two-sided printing can be prohibited in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings. (See
"CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for copier.)
Note
●
●
Two-sided printing is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide).
The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper.
Printing result
Print data
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that
they can be bound at the side. they can be bound at the top.
13
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM WiIdNDOeWSd printing
(part 2)
1
Pamphlet style
Pamphlet style prints two pages each on the front and back of each sheet of paper (four pages total on
one sheet) so that the sheets can be folded down the center and bound to create a pamphlet. This
function is convenient when you wish to compile printed pages into a pamphlet.
To use this function, open the printer driver and select "Tiled Pamphlet" or "2-Up Pamphlet" in
"Document Style" in the "Main" tab.
The binding edge (left side or right side) can be selected in the "Binding Edge" in the "Main" tab. The
following examples show how 8 pages are printed when pamphlet style is selected.
Printing result
Print data
Left
Right
●
Because four pages are printed on each sheet of paper, blank pages are automatically added at the end when the total number
of pages is not a multiple of four.
Note
●
●
●
When "Tiled Pamphlet" is selected, printing will take place on paper that is twice the size of the paper size specified in the
application.
When "2-Up Pamphlet" is selected, each page is reduced in the same way as for 2-Up and printed on the size of paper that is
specified in the application.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and "2 Staples" in "Staple" in the "Main" tab is selected, the output is stapled and folded
at the center to form a pamphlet.
The saddle stitch tray can hold up to 20 sets when the number of sheets is 1 to 5, or 10 sets when the number of sheets is 6 to 10.
Paper sizes that can be used for saddle stitching are Ledger, Letter-R, A3, A4R, B4, 8K, and 16KR.
●
●
14
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printing multiple pages on one page
1
This feature allows you to reduce and print two, four, six, eight or sixteen document pages on a single sheet of paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select the number of pages per sheet (2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, or
16-Up) in "N-Up Printing" in the "Main" tab.
The order of the pages can be changed in the "Order" menu.
The "N-Up Printing" setting is not available when "Fit To Paper Size" is selected.
Note
For example, when "2-Up" or "4-Up" is selected, the result will be as follows depending on the selected order.
N-Up
Left to Right
Right to Left
[2-Up]
N-Up
Right , and Down Down , and Right Left , and Down Down , and Left
[4-Up]
If you select the "Border" checkbox, borderlines will be printed around each page.
Examples for 2-Up and 4-Up are shown here. The order of 6-Up, 8-Up, and 16-Up is the same as 4-Up. The order can be viewed
in the print setting image in the printer driver setup screen.
Note
15
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Fitting the printed image to the paper
1
The printer driver can adjust the size of the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Follow the steps shown below to use this function. The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a Ledger size document
on letter size paper.
The "Fit To Paper Size" setting is not available when "N-Up Printing" is selected.
Note
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup
screen.
Select the actual size of paper to be used for
printing (Letter).
The size of the printed image will be automatically
adjusted to match the paper loaded in the machine.
1
2
3
4
Select the original size (Ledger) of the print
image in "Paper Size".
Paper Size: Ledger
Fit To Paper Size: Letter
Check the "Fit To Page" box.
When using the PS printer driver, select "Fit To Paper
Size" in "Zoom Setting".
Ledger size document
(Paper Size)
Letter size paper
(Fit To Paper Size)
When using the PS printer driver, the print image can be
enlarged or reduced by means of numerical values. (The
vertical and horizontal ratios can be set separately.)
Select "XY-Zoom" in step 3, click the "Width/Length"
button, and adjust the ratios in the screen that appears.
Note
16
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
1
The print image can be rotated 180 degrees.
This feature is used to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps that can
only be loaded in one orientation.
Use this feature when automatic rotation (which takes place when the loaded paper is the same
size as the print image and the orientations are different) results in reversal of the top and bottom
of the image.
To use the feature, select the image orientation in "Image Orientation" on the "Paper" tab, and
then select the "Rotate 180 degrees" checkbox.
Printing result
Rotate 180 degrees
Rotate 180 degrees
A B C D
ABCD
The procedure for loading paper is explained in operation manual for copier.
Note
17
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printing a watermark
1
You can print a watermark such as "CONFIDENTIAL" on your document. To print a watermark, open the printer driver, click the
"Watermarks" tab, and follow the steps below.
How to Print a Watermark
From the "Watermark" drop-down list, select the watermark that you wish to print (for example "CONFIDENTIAL"), and start printing.
Print sample
You can enter text to create your own custom watermark. For details on watermark settings, view printer driver Help.
18
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
(part 1)
1
When a finisher is installed, printed pages can be stapled.
To use this feature, open the printer driver setup screen and select it in the "Finishing"
field of the "Main" tab.
●
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30. When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, up to 50 sheets can be stapled
(up to 25 sheets when the paper size is B4, Foolscap, or larger).
Note
●
Paper sizes that can be used for staple printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, and Foolscap. (B5R
can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
●
●
●
Paper types that can be used for staple printing are Plain, Letter Head, Recycled and Color.
Staple printing is not possible when the ROPM function is disabled. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
If the finisher is disabled in the key operator programs, the staple and punch functions cannot be used and output cannot be
delivered to the offset tray.
Stapling is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
The staple function cannot be used in combination with the "No offset" function.
●
●
When a finisher is installed
The following example shows how portrait oriented pages are stapled together.
Print data
Printing result
The pages are stapled in the upper left-hand corner.
19
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed
(part 2)
1
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the binding edge and number of staples can be selected to produce the following printing results:
Staple
Left
Right
Top
1 Staple
2 Staples
Punch function
When a punch module is installed on a saddle stitch finisher,
the "Punch" checkbox can be selected to punch holes in the
printed output.
Left
Right
Top
Select the punch hole positions in "Binding Edge".
●
The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
Paper sizes that can be punched vary depending on the punch module installed.
Paper types that can be punched are Plain, Recycled, Color, Letter Head, and Heavy paper.
Note
●
●
20
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Print hold function
2
A print job sent to the machine can be held in the machine's memory until the operator initiates printing from the operation panel of
the machine. This is called the Print Hold function.
There are four methods for holding print jobs with the Print Hold function.
Hold After Print
Hold Before Print
When this method is selected, the print job is printed and then
When this method is used, the print job is held in the machine's print hold
retained in the machine's print hold job list. The job can be printed job list without being printed. The operator can initiate printing from the
again as needed from the operation panel of the machine.
operation panel of the machine as needed. This helps prevent print jobs
from being misplaced.
Proof Print
PIN (5-digit ID number)
When this method is selected, one set of copies is printed and then A PIN number can be set that must be entered at the machine's operation
the job is held in the machine's print hold job list.
The operator can check the copies to make sure that the image
position, stapling position, and other aspects of the job are
panel in order to print a "Hold After Print", "Hold Before Print", or "Proof
This helps maintain confidentiality when printing sensitive documents.
satisfactory, and then initiate printing of all sets from the operation When a PIN number is set for "Hold After Print":
panel of the machine. (The initial proof set is included in the total The PIN number must be entered at the operation panel to print the job
number of copies.)
again after the initial printing.
If the proof copies are not satisfactory, the job can be canceled.
When a PIN number is set for "Hold Before Print":
This prevents excessive misprints when printing a large number of The PIN number must be entered at the operation panel to print the job.
copies.
When a PIN number is set for "Proof Print":
Following the initial printing of one set of proof copies, the PIN number must
be entered at the operation panel to print the remaining sets of copies.
●
●
The machine can hold a maximum of 100 print hold jobs. If 100 jobs are exceeded or the memory that can be used for print hold
becomes full, no more print hold jobs will be accepted, an error will appear in the touch panel, or a Notice Page will be printed.
Memory allocated to the print hold function can be changed in the key operator programs. (See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the
key operator's guide.)
Note
21
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Printing using the print hold function
Selecting print hold settings in the printer driver at the time of printing
Select the Print Hold function in the job control screen (see below), which is opened by clicking the
"Job Control" button in the "Main" tab of the printer driver setup screen.
(part 1)
2
2
"Notify Job End" checkbox
Select this checkbox if you wish to be notified when printing
is finished.
This function can only be used when the Printer Status
Monitor is running. If the Printer Status Monitor is not
running, selecting the checkbox will have no effect.
1
3
"Default Job ID" menu
Enter a default user name and job name. These names
appear in the operation panel of the machine.
The user name can be up to 16 characters long and the job
name can be up to 30 characters long.
To always use the entered names, select "Always Use This
User Name" and "Always Use This Job Name". If "Always
Use This User Name" is not selected, your Windows login
name will automatically be used. If "Always Use This Job
Name" is not selected, the file name used in the application
will automatically be used.
2
3
1
"Retention" menu
Select the Print Hold method that you wish to use. After
selecting "Hold After Print", "Hold Before Print", or "Proof
Print", a PIN number can be set if desired. To set a PIN
number, enter a 5-digit number in "PIN".
When you have completed the above settings, click the
"OK" button to close the window and begin printing.
To print the job from the operation panel of the machine, see
22
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Printing using the print hold function
How to print a print hold job
When you print a job using the Print Hold function, the job is stored in the print hold job list in the initial screen of printer mode. Follow
the steps below to print the print hold job.
(part 2)
2
Press the [PRINT] key to switch to the initial
screen of printer mode.
If you set a PIN number in the printer driver,
press the numeric keys to enter the 5-digit
number.
1
3
COPY
The PIN number must be
LIST
ON LINE
entered to print the job. (If you
PRINT
DATA
ENTER PIN VIA THE 10-KEY.
did not set a PIN number, this
SCAN
DATA
step is not necessary.)
CANCEL
As you enter each digit, "-"
cost.xls
changes to " ".
Select the job that you wish to print.
Make sure that the desired number of copies is
set.
2
You can touch the
or
key
PRINT HOLD JOB LIST
4
SHARP001
SHARP002
SHARP003
SHARP004
Microsoft Word -
Microsoft PowerP
product_infi
cost.xls
to change screens.
To change the number of
NUMBER OF PRINTS
copies, touch the
or
key.
23
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Printing using the print hold function
(part 3)
2
Touch the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key
or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key.
To delete the job after printing,
Printing begins.
5
6
If another print job is already in progress, the job is
stored. The job will be printed when all previous jobs are
finished.
touch the [PRINT AND
product_information.pdf
CANCEL
DELETE THE DATA] key. To
retain the job, touch the [PRINT
AND SAVE THE DATA] key.
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA
DELETE
To delete a job without printing it, touch the [DELETE]
key.
Note
Points to note about the Print Hold function
●
The print hold function can only be used when ROPM is enabled.
If a Notice page is printed or an error appears in the print job complete screen when you execute printing at your computer, there
are already 100 print hold jobs or the machine's memory is full. Delete any unnecessary print hold jobs and then try printing again.
●
●
●
The amount of memory allocated to the print hold function can be changed in the key operator programs. (See "MEMORY FOR
PRINTER" in the key operator's guide.)
If memory full errors frequently occur, it is recommended that additional memory be installed in the machine.
Turning off the machine's power switch will erase the print hold jobs stored in the machine.
24
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Carbon copy print
2
Carbon copy print is used to print copies of the same page on different types of paper. Each paper type is loaded in a different tray,
and the different paper types must all be the same size.
For example, carbon copy print can be performed with standard paper in tray 1 and colored paper in tray 2 for output as an invoice
original and copy. As another example, standard paper can be loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper can be loaded in tray 2 to create
an original for presentation and a copy to be retained.
When carbon copy print is used to print a two-page job with two copies per page, "Collate" can be selected in the "Main" tab to obtain
the following print results.
Printing result (when number of copies is "2")
Print data
Collate
Collate
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
Load different types of the same size of paper in trays 1, 2, and The copies are collated.
3, and specify tray 1 as the "Top Copy" and trays 2 and 3 as the
carbon copy trays.
The copies are grouped by page.
25
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Printing using carbon copy print
2
To use the carbon copy print function, select the "Carbon Copy" checkbox in the "Paper" tab of the
printer driver setup screen, and then click the "Carbon Copy Settings" button to configure print
settings.
1
2
"Top Copy" menu
Select the tray that will be used for the original.
"Carbon Copy" menu
Select the tray or trays that will be used for the carbon
copies.
Be sure to select only trays that have the same size of paper
as the "Top Copy".
1
2
●
The tray selected as the "Top Copy" cannot be
Note
selected.
●
If a tray with a size of paper different from the "Top
Copy" is selected, the paper in that tray will not be used.
When you have completed the above settings, click the "OK" button to close the window and then execute printing.
●
Carbon copy print is not possible when two-sided printing, pamphlet style, or staple printing is selected.
The bypass tray cannot be used for carbon copy printing.
Note
●
26
ADVANCED PRINTING (WINDOWS)
Printing text and lines in black
2
Color text and lines that are faint when printed normally can be printed in black to improve legibility.
Printing text in black
Printing lines in black
Text that is any color other than white is printed in black.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and
select the "Text To Black" checkbox in the "Advanced" tab.
Lines and solids that are any color other than white are printed
in black.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and
select the "Vector To Black" checkbox in the "Advanced" tab.
Printing result
Print data
Printing result
Print data
Text To Black
Text To Black
Vector To Black
Vector To Black
ABCD
EFGH
ABCD
EFGH
ABCD
EFGH
●
●
When using the PCL6 printer driver, if "Print as
graphics" is selected in "TrueType Mode" of "Font" in
the "Advanced" tab, this function cannot be used.
When using the PCL5e printer driver, if "Raster" is
selected in "Graphics mode" in the "Advanced" tab,
this function cannot be used.
Note
When using the PCL6 or PCL5e printer driver, if "Raster"
is selected in "Graphics mode" in the "Advanced" tab,
this function cannot be used.
Note
27
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Printer utilities
3
The "Software" CD-ROM contains the following two printer
utilities.
Before using the Printer Status Monitor
Note the following points before using the Printer Status
Monitor.
Printer Status Monitor (for general users)
This allows the user to check on the computer screen whether
or not the machine is able to print.
It provides information on error states such as paper misfeeds
and shows the configuration of the machine (number of trays,
whether or not there is a finisher, etc.) by means of illustrations.
Available paper sizes and paper remaining are also indicated.
Printing via a server
When the first print job is executed after starting up the Printer
Status Monitor, the machine's IP address is automatically set in
the Printer Status Monitor.
Direct printing without a server
Install and configure the software as explained in "USING THE
MACHINE AS A NETWORK PRINTER" in the software setup
guide for network printer. (This is not necessary if the software
has already been installed and configured.)
Printer Administration Utility (for administrators)
This allows the administrator to check information on supplies
and error states of the machine and other SHARP printers
(compatible with the Printer Administration Utility) that are
connected to the network. Settings can also be changed via the
utility.
To install the Printer Status Monitor and Printer
Note
Administration Utility, see software setup guide for
network printer.
28
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Using the printer utilities
(part 1)
3
Starting up the printer utilities
Using the printer utilities
If the Printer Status Monitor or Printer Administration Utility is
not running, use the following procedure to start the utilities.
For information on using the Printer Status Monitor and Printer
Administration Utility, see the Help files for each. The Help files
can be viewed as follows:
When the Printer Administration Utility is first started up,
Note
the TCP/IP settings window appears. To monitor the
Printer Status Monitor
machine on a local network, select the "Local Subnet
Search" checkbox. Otherwise, enter the machine's IP
address. For more information, see the Help file.
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003) and
then "SHARP Printer Status Monitor". Select "Help".
Printer Status Monitor
Printer Administration Utility
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003) and
then "SHARP Printer Status Monitor". Select "Printer Status
Monitor".
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003) and
then "SHARP Printer Administration Utility". Select "Help".
Printer Administration Utility
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003) and
then "SHARP Printer Administration Utility". Select "Printer
Administration Utility".
29
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Using the printer utilities
Changing the Printer Status Monitor settings
Once installed, the Printer Status Monitor normally runs in the background in Windows. If you need to change the Printer Status
Monitor settings, follow the steps below.
(part 2)
3
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon ( )
on the task bar, and select "Preferences" from
the pop-up menu.
Change the Printer Status Monitor settings as desired.
For information on the Printer Status Monitor settings,
see Printer Status Monitor Help. (Click the "Help" button
in the settings window.)
1
2
If the Printer Status Monitor icon does not appear on the
Printer Status Monitor.
Note
30
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Using the printer utilities
Checking the printer status
(part 3)
3
The Printer Status Monitor allows you to check whether or not toner and paper remain in the machine.
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon ( )
on the task bar, and select "SHARP AR-XXXX
Status" from the pop-up menu.
1
The icon turns red when printing is not possible due to a
machine error or other problem.
Note
To collapse the window, click the "Hide detail" button.
By default, the collapsed window initially appears when
Click the "Detail" button.
The window expands to show machine status details.
2
Note
"SHARP AR-XXXX Status" is selected in Step 1. If
desired, you can change the setting to have the
expanded window initially appear.
31
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
(part 1)
4
To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, and the PS3 expansion kit must be installed and the machine must be connected
to a network. To install the PPD file and configure the printer driver settings, see the software setup guide for network printer.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS
Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.
Mac OS X
(2)
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
1
TextEdit.
Make sure that the correct printer is selected.
2
Select paper settings.
3
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
Click the [OK] button.
4
(4)
(3)
The machine name that appears in the "Format for"
menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine
model.)
Note
32
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
Mac OS 9
(part 2)
4
(2)
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
1
2
3
SimpleText.
Make sure that the correct printer is selected.
Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
Click the [OK] button.
(3)
(4)
4
The machine name that appears in the "Format for"
Note
menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine
model.)
33
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
PRINTING
(part 3)
4
Make sure that the ON LINE indicator on the
Make sure that the correct printer is selected.
1
4
operation panel is lit.
If the ON LINE indicator is not
on, press the [PRINT] key to
switch to printer mode and then
touch the [ONLINE] key.
COPY
ON LINE
PRINT
DATA
SCAN
DATA
The status of the printer function is indicated by the ON
LINE and DATA indicators next to the [PRINT] key.
●
The machine name that appears in the "Printer:" menu
ON LINE indicator
DATA indicator
Note
is the name that was entered when AppleTalk settings
were configured from the CD-ROM for the print server
card. Unless the name was changed when configuring
the settings, it will be "SCxxxxxx" (where "xxxxxx" is a
sequence of characters that varies depending on your
machine).
The Print window varies depending on the operating
system version, the printer driver version, and the
application.
There is print data in
memory that has not
been printed yet.
The machine is online
and ready to print.
Lit
The machine is
printing.
Blinking
Off
—
●
The machine is offline The machine is not
and not ready to print. printing.
Start the application and open the document
that you wish to print.
2
3
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
menu.
34
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
(part 4)
4
Printing begins. The print job is delivered to one of the
following trays (depending on which output devices are
installed):
Configure print settings.
5
Click
next to "Copies &
Pages" ("General" in Mac OS
9.0 to 9.2.2) and select the
settings that you wish to
●
Job separator tray kit is installed: Upper tray
●
Finisher is installed: Center tray
configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding
setting screen will appear.
●
The output tray can be selected in the key operator
programs (see "OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key
operator's guide).
The output tray can be selected when selecting print
settings at the time of printing. Select the output tray in
"Output" in the "Advanced" menu of the Print window.
Note
●
●
If you are using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, select the
output tray in "Output" in the "Output/Document
Style" menu of the Print window.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5, select the output
tray in the "Output" tab in the "Printer Features" menu
of the Print Window.
●
The settings vary depending on the operating system
version, the printer driver version, and the application.
Note
●
If the paper type setting in the printer driver is different
from the bypass tray's paper type setting in the
machine, printing may stop. To resume printing, press
the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key in the touch panel, and specify
the same paper type as in the printer driver.
Click the "Print" button .
6
35
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
When "Paper Feed" is set to "Auto Select"
If "Paper Feed" is set to "Auto Select" in the Print window and
the correct size of paper is not loaded in the machine, the
printing method will vary depending on the "FORCED OUTPUT
OF PRINT" setting in the key operator programs (see the key
operator's guide).
(part 5)
4
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear in the touch panel.
Press the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key, load paper in the bypass tray, and then
touch the [BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is enabled
Printing will take place using a size of paper that is close to the
size of the print image.
If the paper is loaded in a different orientation than the
Note
print image, the image is automatically rotated to match
the paper. This setting can be changed in the key
operator programs (see "ROTATED PRINT" in the key
operator's guide).
36
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
When "Paper Feed" is set to paper tray or paper type
If "Paper Feed" (or "Paper Source" in "General" in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2) is set to paper tray or paper type in the Print window but
there is no paper in the trays that matches your selection, printing will take place as follows:
(part 6)
4
The size and type of paper loaded in each tray and whether or not the paper loaded in each tray can be used for printing are
specified in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings. (See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for copier.
You selected a tray, but the size of the paper in the selected tray does not match the printing size.
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place using the paper in the selected tray.
You selected a paper type, and although the selected type of paper is loaded in the machine, its size does
not match the printing size.
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place using the selected paper type.
However, if "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled, printing will not take place.
You selected a paper type, but the selected type of paper is not loaded in the machine.
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to print from the bypass tray will appear. Press the [PRINT] key on the
operation panel, touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key, load the correct size and type of paper in the bypass tray, and then touch the
[BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
37
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM MiAdCINeTOdSH printing
(part 1)
4
This feature allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
Mac OS X
Mac OS X
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
Select [Layout].
Select [Output/Document Style].
1
2
1
2
Select [Long-edged binding] or [Short-edged
binding].
Select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].
●
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, select the settings in [Duplex].
In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in [Advanced].
Note
●
38
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM MiAdCINeTOdSH printing
(part 2)
4
●
Paper sizes that can be used for two-sided printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, and
Foolscap.
Paper types that can be used for two-sided printing are Plain, Letter Head*, Recycled and Color.
* The use of Letter Head paper for two-sided printing can be prohibited in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings. (See
"CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for copier.)
Note
●
●
Two-sided printing is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide).
The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper.
Printing result
Print data
Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)
Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)
The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that
they can be bound at the side. they can be bound at the top.
39
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM MiAdCINeTOdSH printing
(part 3)
4
Pamphlet style
Pamphlet style prints two pages each on the front and back of each sheet of paper (four pages total on one sheet) so that the sheets can be
folded down the center and bound to create a pamphlet. This function is convenient when you wish to compile printed pages into a pamphlet.
Mac OS X
(This function cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.)
(1)
(2)
Select [Printer Features].
Select the "Binding Edge".
1
2
[2 Staples] can be selected in the "Staple" menu when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].
3
In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "2-Side Printing"
and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
(3)
Note
40
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM MiAdCINeTOdSH printing
(part 4)
4
Mac OS 9
(1) (2)
Select [Output/Document Style].
1
2
3
Select [Pamphlet(Left)] or [Pamphlet(Right)].
To staple, select [2 Stapling Pattern 7 (Pamphlet)].
[2 Stapling Pattern 7 (Pamphlet)] can be selected when
a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(3)
41
PTRIwNTINoG FR-OsM MiAdCINeTOdSH printing
(part 5)
4
The following examples show how 8 pages are printed when pamphlet style is selected.
Printing result
Print data
Left
Right
●
●
●
●
Because four pages are printed on each sheet of paper, blank pages are automatically added at the end when the total number
of pages is not a multiple of four.
When "Tiled Pamphlet" is selected, printing will take place on paper that is twice the size of the paper size specified in the
application.
When "2-Up Pamphlet" is selected, each page is reduced in the same way as for 2-Up and printed on the size of paper that is
specified in the application.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and "2 Staples" in "Staple" in the "Main" tab is selected, the output is stapled and folded
at the center to form a pamphlet.
Note
●
●
The saddle stitch tray can hold up to 20 sets when the number of sheets is 1 to 5, or 10 sets when the number of sheets is 6 to 10.
Paper sizes that can be used for saddle stitching are Ledger, Letter-R, A3, A4R, B4, 8K, and 16KR.
42
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Printing multiple pages on one page
(part 1)
4
This feature allows you to reduce and print two, four, six, nine or sixteen document pages on a single sheet of paper.
For example, when "2-Up" or "4-Up" is selected, the result will be as follows depending on the selected order.
N-Up
Left to Right
Right to Left
[2-Up]
N-Up
Right , and Down Down , and Right Left , and Down Down , and Left
[4-Up]
43
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Printing multiple pages on one page
(part 2)
4
Mac OS X
Mac OS 9
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(4)
(3)
Select [Layout].
Select [Layout].
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Select the number of pages per sheet.
Select the order of the pages.
Select the number of pages per sheet.
Select the order of the pages.
If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
44
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Fitting the printed image to the paper
4
The printer driver can adjust the size of the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. (This function can
only be used in Mac OS X v10.4 to 10.4.8.)
Follow the steps shown below to use this function. The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a letter size document on
Ledger size paper.
(2)
(1)
Select [Paper Handling].
1
2
Check the size of the print image (for example:
Letter).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.
Select [Scale to fit paper size].
3
4
(3)
(4)
Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Ledger).
45
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
(part 1)
4
The print image can be rotated 180 degrees.
This feature is used to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps that can only be loaded in one orientation.
Use this feature when automatic rotation (which takes place when the loaded paper is the same size as the print image and the
orientations are different) results in reversal of the top and bottom of the image.
Printing result
Rotate 180 degrees
Rotate 180 degrees
A B C D
ABCD
The procedure for loading paper is explained in operation manual for copier.
Note
46
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
(part 2)
4
Mac OS X
Mac OS 9
(3)
(1) (2)
(1)
(2)
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and
click the button.
Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and
select [PostScript Options].
1
2
1
2
Click the [OK] button.
Select the [Flip Horizontal] and [Flip Vertical]
checkboxes
.
The print image will show an image of the print result.
Click the [OK] button.
3
47
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Printing a watermark
(part 2)
4
Mac OS X
Mac OS 9
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
Select [Watermark].
1
2
Configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured. Select
the text from the "Watermark" menu. Select the size and
angle of the text from the corresponding menus.
Select [Watermarks].
1
2
Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure
watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font.
Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the
slide bar
.
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, adjust the watermark settings on
the [Watermark] tab of [Printer Features].
Note
49
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
(part 1)
4
When a finisher is installed, printed pages can be stapled.
●
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30. When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, up to 50 sheets can be stapled
(up to 25 sheets when the paper size is B4, Foolscap, or larger).
Note
●
Paper sizes that can be used for staple printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, and Foolscap. (B5R
can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
●
●
●
Paper types that can be used for staple printing are Plain, Letter Head, Recycled and Color.
Staple printing is not possible when the ROPM function is disabled. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
If the finisher is disabled in the key operator programs, the staple and punch functions cannot be used and output cannot be
delivered to the offset tray.
Stapling is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
The staple function cannot be used in combination with the "No offset" function.
●
●
When a finisher is installed
The following example shows how portrait oriented pages are stapled together.
Print data
Printing result
The pages are stapled in the upper left-hand corner.
50
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed
(part 2)
4
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the binding edge and number of staples can be selected to produce the following printing results:
Staple
Left
Right
Top
1 Staple
2 Staples
Punch function
When a punch module is installed on a saddle stitch finisher,
holes can be punched in the printed output.
Left
Right
Top
●
The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
Paper sizes that can be punched vary depending on the punch module installed.
Paper types that can be punched are Plain, Recycled, Color, Letter Head, and Heavy paper.
Note
●
●
51
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
(part 3)
4
Mac OS X
Mac OS 9
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Select [Output/Document Style].
Select [Printer Features].
Select the "Binding Edge".
1
2
1
2
3
Select the staple function or the punch function.
If you are stapling, select the stapling pattern from the
"1-Sided Staple" menu or the "2-Sided Staple" menu.
After a pattern is selected, a print image showing the
binding edge will appear.
If you are punching, select the binding edge from the
"Punch" menu.
Select the staple function or the punch function.
For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark appears.
●
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, the binding edge cannot be selected. If the paper is oriented vertically, the binding edge will be the left edge. If the paper is
oriented horizontally, the binding edge will be the bottom edge. Select the staple settings or punch settings on the [Output] tab of [Printer Features].
In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in [Advanced].
Note
●
52
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Job control function (Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 and Mac OS X v10.2 to 10.4)
4
Printing when auditing mode is enabled
Using the print hold function
When "AUDITING MODE" is enabled in the key operator
programs, enter your 5-digit account number in "Account
Number" in the "Job Control" menu of the Print window.
The print hold function is enabled in "Job Control" in the Print
window.
Select the function that you wish to use in the "Retention" menu.
●
In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, select "On" in "Account
Note
Number" in "Job Control" in the Print window, and
enter your 5-digit account number in the box at right.
Account numbers are stored in the key operator
●
programs. (See "ACCOUNT CONTROL" in the key
operator's guide.)
●
To assign a PIN number to a print job, enter a 5-digit
number in "PIN". (In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, select "On"
in "Confidential Print Password" and enter a 5-digit
number in the box at right.)
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, the print hold function cannot be
●
When auditing mode is enabled, a print job may not be
printed if an account number is not entered or an
incorrect account number is entered. This depends on
the key operator program settings. See "CANCEL JOBS
OF INVALID ACCOUNTS" in the key operator's guide.
Note
Caution
●
used.
●
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, auditing mode cannot be used. For
this reason, do not enable "CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID
ACCOUNTS" in the key operator programs because
printing will not be possible. (Printed pages will be added
to the "OTHERS" count.)
53
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Giving priority to a print job / Canceling a print job
Giving priority to a print job
When a print job is waiting because the machine is copying or printing a received fax, the following procedure can be used to
interrupt the current job and immediately print the print job. Use the print job status screen to give priority to the job. For more
information on using the job status screen, see operation manual for copier.
(part 1)
5
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Touch the [PRIORITY] key.
1
4
A message appears asking you
ITING
LINE
DATA
DETAIL
PRIORITY
FAX
to confirm the priority print job.
Touch the [OK] key to interrupt
the current job and begin
printing the print job selected in
ITING
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
STOP/DE
X JOB
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
To view information on a print job, select it and then
touch the [DETAIL] key.
2
Note
The print job status screen
010 / 00
SHARP001
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
PRINT JOB
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
In the job keys of the jobs waiting to be printed,
touch the key of the job that you wish to print
immediately.
3
The touched key is highlighted.
54
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Giving priority to a print job / Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job
(part 2)
5
A print job in progress or waiting to be printed can be canceled. Use the print job status screen to cancel the job.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
The job in progress and the jobs waiting to be
printed appear. Touch the key of the job that you
wish to cancel.
1
3
4
LINE
DATA
FAX
The touched key is highlighted.
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.
A message appears asking you
to confirm the cancellation.
Touch the [YES] key to delete
the job.
ITING
DETAIL
ITING
PRIORITY
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
2
STOP/DELETE
X JOB
The print job status screen
If you do not wish to cancel the
010 / 00
SHARP001
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
job, touch the [NO] key.
PRINT JOB
To pause a print job during printing, press the [PRINT]
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
Note
key on the operation panel and then touch the
[OFFLINE] key. ([OFFLINE] is highlighted.)
• To cancel a print job, press the [CLEAR] key ( ).
• To resume printing, touch the [ONLINE] key to switch
the machine online.
55
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 1)
5
The printer condition settings allow basic printer settings to be configured. The following items can be set:
*
●
●
DEFAULT SETTINGS: Basic settings used in printing.
PCL SETTINGS: PCL symbol set, font, line feed code, and
other settings.
PostScript SETTINGS : Sets whether a PostScript error
●
page is printed or not when a
PostScript error occurs.
*Appears when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
When the printer condition settings and the printer driver settings do not agree, the printer driver settings take precedence. Print
settings that can be selected in the printer driver should be selected in the printer driver at the time of printing.
Note
How to configure the settings
Press the [PRINT] key.
Touch the key of the desired item to display its
setting screen.
1
3
The initial screen of printer
mode appears.
COPY
PRINT
SCAN
EXIT
CONDITION SETTINGS
ON LINE
DATA
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
DATA
PostScript SETTINGS
Touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS] key.
For information on each of the settings, see "Printer
2
ONLINE
Any print jobs that have
OFFLINE
1/1
already been sent to the
BYPASS TRAY
machine, including print hold
CONDITION
jobs stored in the machine,
SETTINGS
will be printed using the
DE
printer condition settings that
were effect when the job was
sent.
56
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 2)
5
Touch the desired setting on the setting screen
of the desired item and touch the [OK] key.
When finished, touch the [EXIT] key.
4
5
EXIT
CONDITION SETTINGS
OK
DEFAULT SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
4
TONER SAVE
PostScript SETTINGS
COPIES
1
P
ORIENTATION
To set another item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
More information on the condition setting screen
The following keys appear in screens that
require the entry of numerical values.
OK
DEFAULT SETTINGS
TONER SAVE
(1 999)
1
1/4
1
2
COPIES
1
P
3
ORIENTATION
4
5
1 When a checkbox ( ) appears in front of a setting, a checkmark ( ) will appear when the checkbox is touched.
This indicates that the setting is enabled. If a checkbox with a checkmark ( ) is touched, the checkmark is cleared ( ) and the
setting is disabled.
2
3
X X X
When a key that appears in the form
is touched, the setting screen of that key will appear.
If the settings continue on the following screen(s), touch the
return to the category selection screen, touch the [OK] key.
The currently set numerical value is displayed.
and
keys to move back and forth through the screens. To
4
5
Numerical values can be set by touching the
and
keys.
57
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 3)
5
Printer condition setting menu
Click on a setting to view an explanation of the setting.
CONDITION SETTINGS
CONDITION SETTINGS
Factory default settings
Factory default settings
3 (PC-8)
Disabled
1
INTERNAL FONT: 0
(Courier)
PORTRAIT
8 ½ x 11
0
Disabled
AUTO
Factory default settings
Disabled
Disabled
600dpi
* Appears when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Disabled
1-SIDED
Enabled
Enabled
You can view the current printer condition settings by printing the "PRINTER SETTINGS LIST" in "LIST PRINT" in the custom
settings.
Note
58
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
Printer condition settings
Factory default settings are indicated in bold.
DEFAULT SETTINGS
(part 4)
5
Item
Selections
Description
TONER SAVE
Enabled, Disabled (no This enables or disables toner save mode. Toner save mode conserves toner
checkmark)
by printing a slightly lighter image.
COPIES
1 - 999
This is used to select the number of copies.
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT,
LANDSCAPE
This sets the orientation of the printed page. Select "PORTRAIT" when the
image is longer in the vertical direction, or "LANDSCAPE" when the image is
longer in the horizontal direction.
DEFAULT PAPER
SIZE
5 ½ x 8 ½, 8 ½ x 11, 8 This sets the default paper size used for the printed image. Even if the set size
½ x 13, 8 ½ x 14, 11 x of paper is not in any of the trays, the printed image is formed in accordance
17, A5, B5, A4, B4, A3 with this setting.
DEFAULT PAPER
SOURCE
AUTO,
Set the default paper tray. When set to "AUTO", the paper tray with the size of
paper set in "DEFAULT PAPER SIZE" is automatically selected.
*Selections available depend on the trays that are installed.
BYPASS (MANUAL),
BYPASS (AUTO),
TRAY 1,
TRAY 2,
TRAY 3*,
TRAY 4*
DEFAULT PAPER
TYPE
AUTO, PLAIN,
RECYCLED, LETTER
HEAD, COLOR
This is used to select the default paper type. When set to "AUTO", the paper
tray with the size of paper set in "DEFAULT PAPER SIZE" is automatically
selected.
(continued)
59
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 5)
5
Item
Selections
Description
SMOOTHING
Enabled, Disabled (no This enables or disables smoothing. This function improves image quality by
checkmark)
smoothing angles and curves in the image. When smoothing is enabled using
a resolution of 600 dpi, an image quality equivalent to 1200 dpi can be
obtained. When printing a bitmap image, disabling smoothing may in some
circumstances provide a better result.
RESOLUTION
300dpi, 600dpi
This sets the resolution for printing.
EXTRA PRINT MODE Enabled, Disabled (no When mostly single-page jobs are printed, this function can be used to increase
checkmark)
printing efficiency by shortening the wait time between print jobs. Normally this
function is not enabled.
When the function is enabled (a checkmark appears), multiple print jobs are
processed as a single job when all of the jobs have the same print format. The
jobs appear as a single job key in the job status screen.
When print hold, staple printing, different paper setting ("Last Page" only), or
transparency inserts is selected in the printer driver, EXTRA PRINT MODE
does not function. EXTRA PRINT MODE also does not function if the paper
size or other print format setting is changed or a notice page is printed due to
a memory error.
Print processing efficiency increases when this mode is used, and for this
reason notification that the job is finished may not appear at the same time as
completion of output of the printed pages. In addition, special print processing
may prevent the appropriate appearance of notification that the job is finished.
(continued)
60
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 6)
5
Item
Selections
Description
2-SIDE PRINT
1-SIDED,
2-SIDED (Book),
2-SIDED (Tablet)
When "2-SIDED (Book)" is selected, two-sided printing takes place so as to
allow binding at the left side. When "2-SIDED (Tablet)" is selected, two-sided
printing takes place so as to allow binding at the top.
PAGE PROTECTION
ROPM
Enabled (checkmark
appears), Disabled
This enables page protection. Page protection prevents data loss errors when
printing complex jobs.
Enabled (checkmark
appears), Disabled
This enables the ROPM function. When enabled, multi-page print jobs are
stored in memory before printing, and thus the computer does not need to
repeatedly send the print data when multiple copies are printed.
61
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 7)
5
PCL SETTINGS
Item
Selections
Description
PCL SYMBOL SET
SETTING
1 - 35
This specifies which country's characters (PCL symbol set) are assigned to
certain of the symbols in the character code list. The factory default setting is
"3" (PC-8). The numbers corresponding to each PCL symbol set can be viewed
by printing "PCL SYMBOL SET LIST" in "LIST PRINT" in the custom settings.
PCL FONT SETTINGS INTERNAL FONT (0 -
This specifies which PCL font to use for printing. One font can be specified from
80), EXTENDED FONT among the internal fonts and extended fonts (when the barcode font kit is
(1 - )
installed). The factory default setting is "0" (internal font: Courier).
The fonts that are available can be viewed by printing the font list in "LIST
PRINT" in the custom settings. The font names, numbers assigned to each
font, and print samples appear in the list. A font is specified for PCL FONT
SETTINGS by entering the number assigned to the font.
LINE FEED CODE
WIDE A4
0 - 3
This specifies the line break code by means of a combination of the "CR"
(return) code, "LF" (line break) code, and "FF" (page break) code. The factory
default setting is printing based on the transmitted code. The setting can be
changed by selecting one of four combinations.
Enabled, Disabled (no This setting can be enabled to print 80 lines on A4 size paper with each line
checkmark)
10CPI font (English characters). When the setting is disabled (a checkmark
does not appear), each line is 78 characters long.
62
OPERATION AT THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 8)
5
PostScript SETTINGS
"PostScript SETTINGS" only appears when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Item
Selections
Enabled, Disabled (no When this setting is enabled, an error description is printed each time a
checkmark) PostScript error occurs.
Description
PRINT PS ERRORS
63
OPPErRAiTnIONtATiTnHEgMACHtINhE e printer setting and font lists
5
To check the current printer condition settings or fonts that can be used, print the printer setting list or one of the font lists.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the list that you wish to print.
1
2
3
4
TTINGS
Printing begins.
EST PAGE
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
PRINTER
SETTINGS LIST
PCL SYMBOL
SET LIST
B STATUS
PCL EXTENDED
FONT LIST
PS INTERNAL
FONT LIST
The following lists can be printed.
Touch the [LIST PRINT] key.
●
PRINTER SETTINGS LIST
●
PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
Y
T
LIST PRINT
●
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
●
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST (When an option font kit
S
L
RECEIVE MODE
is installed.)
●
PS INTERNAL FONT LIST (When the PS3 expansion
kit is installed.)
NIC PAGE
●
Touch the [PRINTER TEST PAGE] key.
PRINTER TEST PAGE
FAX RRT
SENDING ADDRESS LIST
64
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
6
This chapter describes how to solve printer problems. Refer to the relevant section based on the problem.
To load paper, remove paper misfeeds, load staples in the finisher, remove jammed staples, or replace the toner cartridge, see
"TROUBLESHOOTING" in operation manual for copier.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
65
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 1)
6
Check the connections
USB or parallel connection in Windows
Network connection
■ Is the interface cable compatible with the machine
■ Is the LAN cable disconnected?
and computer?
Make sure that the LAN cable is firmly inserted in the
connectors on the machine and the computer.
For information on connecting the LAN cable, see software
setup guide for network printer.
Interface cables compatible with this machine are USB and
parallel cables. Check which type of cable is supported by
your computer.
For the specifications of the interface cable, see
"CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER" in the software setup
guide for network printer.
■ Is the machine configured for use on the same
network as the computer?
The machine cannot be used if it is not connected to the
same network as the computer, or if it is not configured for
use on the network.
■ Is the interface cable connected securely?
Check if the interface cable is securely plugged into the
connectors of the machine and computer.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
To connect the cable, see "CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER"
in the software setup guide for network printer.
■ Are any other USB peripherals being connected
along with the machine?
If your computer is connected to the machine through a USB
hub, see if printing is possible when no other USB devices
are connected, or if printing is possible when the machine
and computer are directly connected.
■ If the interface cable becomes disconnected
If the interface cable becomes disconnected, even only once
during the machine's operation, then printing may be disrupted.
If this occurs, check the interface cable and ensure that it is
securely connected, then restart the computer.
66
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 2)
6
Check Your Computer
■
Is there enough computer memory or hard disk space?
To use the machine, your computer must have sufficient
memory and hard disk space. If there is insufficient hard disk
space, delete unnecessary files to increase the free space of
the hard disk. If there is insufficient memory, close unnecessary
applications to increase memory available for printing.
Points to check on the Macintosh
■ Is AppleTalk enabled?
In Mac OS X, click "Network" in "System Preferences" and
select Ethernet in "Show". Click the "AppleTalk" tab and
make sure that "Make AppleTalk Active" is selected.
In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, open the "Chooser" from the Apple
menu and make sure that "Active" is selected. Printing is not
possible if "Active" is not selected.
Points to check in Windows
■ If your computer is connected to the machine
through the parallel port, is the parallel port (LPT)
mode set to other than EPP mode? (when using a
parallel connection in Windows)
■ Is "Ethernet" selected for the "Connect via" of
AppleTalk? (When using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.)
Open "AppleTalk" from the "Control Panels" and make sure
that "Ethernet" is selected in the "Connect via" menu.
Printing is not possible if "Ethernet" is not selected.
The machine may not operate correctly if the parallel port
mode is set to EPP mode. To set the parallel port mode to a
mode other than EPP mode, refer to your computer manual
or ask the manufacturer of the computer. ECP mode is
recommended to obtain the best performance from the
machine. Note that some computers may use different
names for the modes.
If you are using Windows XP/Server 2003, the "Found
New Hardware Wizard" may appear after you change
Note
the port setting. In this case, click the "Cancel" button to
close the wizard, and then reinstall the printer driver as
explained in "USING THE MACHINE WITH A
PARALLEL OR USB CONNECTION" in the software
setup guide for network printer.
67
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 3)
6
Check the machine
■ Power switch on?
■ Copy job being performed?
Turn the power switch on. (See "POWER ON AND OFF" in
the operation manual for copier)
Wait until copying is finished. You can also select the key of
the job that you wish to print in the job status screen and then
touch the [PRIORITY] key. Copying will be interrupted and
the selected job printed.
■ Is the machine online?
When the ON LINE indicator next to the [PRINT] key on the
operation panel is lit, the machine is online and ready to
print. If the ON LINE indicator is off, press the [PRINT] key
and then touch the [ONLINE] key. (When [ONLINE] is
highlighted, the machine is online.)
■ Is the "I/O TIMEOUT" setting too short?
Set a longer time for "I/O TIMEOUT" in the key operator
programs.
COPY
ONLINE
OFFLINE
ON LINE
DATA
1/1
PRINT
BYPASS TRAY
CONDITION
SETTINGS
SCAN
DATA
■
Has an error occurred such as a paper misfeed, staple
jam in the finisher, out of paper, or out of toner?
When one of the above errors occurs, a message will appear
in the touch panel to alert you.
Follow the instructions in the message to clear the error.
Printing will automatically resume when the error is cleared.
For information on handling errors, see "TROUBLESHOOTING"
in operation manual for copier.
68
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 4)
6
Checking the printer driver
2 Check if the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
is shown.
■ Is your machine selected correctly in the current
application for the print job?
Select the printer driver of the machine in the print settings
window of the application.
●
If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon of the
machine.
●
If the printer icon of the machine does not appear, the printer
driver is not installed correctly. Follow the instructions in the
software setup guide for network printer to correctly install the
printer driver.
If the printer drivers are selected from a pull-down menu,
select the printer driver of the machine from the menu.
■ Is the port configured correctly?
Points to check in Windows
It is possible that there is a problem with the port
configuration, for example another printer driver may be
using the port. Open the printer driver properties and
correctly configure the port that you are using.
☞See the software setup guide for network printer.
■ Has the printer driver been installed properly?
Follow the steps below to make sure that the printer driver is
installed correctly.
1 Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click
"Printers and Other Hardware", and then click
"Printers and Faxes".
If for some reason the printer driver does not operate
correctly, delete the printer driver and then reinstall it as
explained in the software setup guide for network printer.
●
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start" button,
select "Settings" and then click "Printers".
On Windows Server 2003, click the "Start" button and then
●
click "Printers and Faxes".
69
TROUBLESHOOTING
Improper printing operation
(part 1)
6
Printing is slow
Stapling is not possible (when a finisher
or a saddle stitch finisher is installed)
■ Simultaneous use of two or more application
software programs?
■ Is stapling disabled in the key operator programs?
Enable stapling in the key operator programs (see
Start printing after quitting all unused application software
programs.
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
■ Is an appropriate print quality selected in the printer
driver?
■ Is the finisher disabled in the key operator programs
(when a saddle stitch finisher is installed)?
Enable the finisher in the key operator programs. (See
"USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS" in the
operation manual for the saddle stitch finisher, and
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide.)
It takes longer to process the print data when "SMOOTHING"
is enabled, and this may slow the printing speed. Be sure to
select print quality settings that are appropriate for the image
being printed.
Windows: Change the print quality settings in the "Advanced"
tab of the printer driver setup screen.
Macintosh: Change the print quality settings in the
"Advanced" menu in the Print window. (In Mac
OS X v10.1.5, change the print quality settings in
the "Advanced" tab of the "Printer Features"
menu.)
■ Did you attempt to print more pages than can be
stapled?
When a finisher is installed, up to 30 sheets can be stapled.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, up to 50 sheets can
be stapled (up to 25 sheets when the paper size is B4,
Foolscap, or larger).
The saddle stitch tray can hold up to 20 sets when the
number of sheets is 1 to 5, or 10 sets when the number of
sheets is 6 to 10.
Two-sided printing is not possible
■ Is two-sided printing disabled in the key operator
programs?
■ Are pages of different width mixed together in the
print job?
Enable two-sided printing as explained in "DISABLING OF
DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide.
Stapling is not possible when pages of different width are
mixed together in a print job.
70
TROUBLESHOOTING
Improper printing operation
(part 2)
6
■
Does the print job include page sizes that cannot be
stapled?
Punching is not possible (when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed)
Stapling is not possible if the print job includes page sizes
that cannot be stapled.
■ Is the finisher disabled in the key operator
programs?
■ Is the paper tray that is selected in the printer driver
set to a paper size or paper type that cannot be used
for stapling?
Enable the finisher in the key operator programs. (See
"USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS" in the
operation manual for the saddle stitch finisher, and
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide.)
On the machine, set the paper tray to be used for staple
printing to a paper size and paper type that can be used for
stapling.
■ Are pages of different width mixed together in the
print job?
Punching is not possible when pages of different width are
mixed together in a print job.
■ Does the print job include page sizes that cannot be
punched?
Punching is not possible if the print job includes page sizes
that cannot be punched.
■ Is the paper tray that is selected in the printer driver
set to a paper size or paper type that cannot be used
for punching?
On the machine, set the paper tray to be used for punch
printing to a paper size and paper type that can be used for
punching.
71
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 1)
6
Check the paper being used
■ Non-standard paper used?
Check that the paper conforms to the specifications. Refer to
"LOADING PAPER" in the operation manual for copier.
■ Are you using paper with a high moisture content?
Use paper that is in good condition, with a low moisture
content and no curling.
■ Is the paper loaded with the wrong side up?
Some types of paper have a front and a back side. If the
paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side,
toner will not adhere well to the paper and poor print quality
will result.
■ Are you printing on paper that has an uneven
surface?
It may not be possible to print correctly on paper with seams
such as the back of an envelope.
72
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 2)
6
The printed image is coarse
Part of the printed image is missing
■ Have the printer driver settings been specified to
suit both paper and the print job?
■ Did you set sufficient margins in the paper settings
of your application?
The printing resolution can be set to 600 dpi or 300 dpi. When
600 dpi or 300 dpi is selected, "SMOOTHING" can also be
selected to improve the image quality.
Windows: Change the resolution settings in the "Advanced"
tab of the printer driver setup screen.
Printing is not possible at the edges of the paper. The print
margins are 5/32" (4 mm) at the top and bottom of the paper
and 1/8" (3 mm) at the sides of the paper. When configuring the
paper settings in the software application, be sure to establish
margins that are at least as large as the print margins.
Macintosh: Change the resolution settings in the "Advanced"
menu in the Print window. (In Mac OS X v10.1.5,
change the resolution settings in the "Advanced"
tab of the "Printer Features" menu.)
■ Does the paper size set for the print image match the
size of paper loaded in the machine?
Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of
paper loaded in the machine. When "Auto Select" is selected
for the paper source in the print settings, the print method will
vary depending on the settings of the key operator programs.
●
A slower printing speed may result when
Note
"SMOOTHING" is selected.
●
The printed image is distorted
■ Are the print orientation settings correct?
Make sure that the correct paper orientation is selected for
the print image in the application's paper settings and in the
print settings.
■ Is the paper loaded correctly?
If a document is physically damaged when it is output or the
image is skewed on the paper, discard the damaged sheet,
reinsert the paper and print again. Insert the paper so that
there is no visible space between the paper and the paper
guides.
If the paper is loaded in the machine in a different orientation
from the print image, the image is normally automatically
rotated to match the paper; however, if this function has been
disabled in the key operator programs, the paper orientation
must be set in the application. (See "ROTATED PRINT" in the
key operator's guide.)
☞See the operation manual for copier for more details on
inserting paper.
73
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a notice page is printed
(part 1)
6
If you find that a notice page has been printed at the end of a print job, the print data received from the computer has not been
printed as specified. Fix the problem as explained below and then try printing again.
Notice Page regarding memory full on IMC board
The IMC memory is used to store print data when the
ROPM function is used. This memory is also used to
store original image data in the copy mode. The
percentage of IMC memory allocated to the printer
function can be adjusted using a key operator program.
See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator's
guide. The memory can be extended by adding
commercially available memory modules. For details,
contact your SHARP dealer.
Note
****************************************************
Notice Page
****************************************************
The IMC memory full error had occurred,
a normal output was not able to be executed.
Please refer to the operation manual for
the solution method.
When data loss error has occurred:
●
When the Staple function is not selected:
****************************************************
Notice Page
****************************************************
Disable the ROPM function by removing the checkmark from
"ROPM" in the "Configuration" tab of the printer driver setup
screen. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the
software setup guide for network printer.) If you need to use the
ROPM function, lower the resolution setting in the printer driver
or install more memory.
The data loss error had occurred, a normal
output was not able to be executed.
Please refer to the operation manual for
the solution method.
●
When the Staple function is selected:
Lower the resolution setting or increase the "MEMORY FOR
PRINTER" setting in the key operator programs. If this does not
resolve the problem, install more memory.
•
Set the page protection function or enable the ROPM function.
To enable the ROPM function, select the "ROPM" checkbox in
the "Configuration" tab of the printer driver setup screen. (See
"CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software
setup guide for network printer.)
74
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a notice page is printed
(part 2)
6
Notice Page regarding memory full on the printer
board
Disabling notice page printing
Notice page printing can be disabled using a key operator
program (see "PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING" in the key
operator's guide).
****************************************************
Notice Page
****************************************************
The memory full error had occurred, a normal
output was not able to be executed.
Please refer to the operation manual for
the solution method.
●
If the ROPM function has been disabled, enable it.
Clear download fonts or form overlay data in the printer driver
●
settings.
●
Add memory to the printer board. For information on
additional memory, contact your SHARP dealer.
Check the memory setting in the "Configuration" tab in the
●
printer driver settings.
75
TROUBLESHOOTING
Removing the software
(part 1)
6
In the event that you need to remove the printer driver or utilities, follow these steps:
Windows
Macintosh (Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2)
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
Insert the "Software" CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.
1
1
2
3
4
Double-click the CD-ROM icon ( ) on the
desktop and double-click the "Mac OS" folder.
Click "Add or Remove Programs".
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, double-click the
"Add/Remove Programs" icon.
2
3
Double-click the "Installer" icon ( ).
Select "Remove" from the Install menu and then
click the "Remove" button.
Select the driver or utility that you wish to
remove from the list, and click the appropriate
button to remove it.
For more information, refer to your operating manual or
to the help files for your operating system.
Restart your computer.
4
When reinstalling the software, install it correctly as explained in software setup guide for network printer.
Note
76
TROUBLESHOOTING
Removing the software
Mac OS X
(part 2)
6
Delete the printer that uses the machine's PPD
file from the printer list.
1
Delete the PPD file.
2
The PPD file has been copied to the following folder on
the startup disk.
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] -
[en.lproj]
Delete the PPD file of the machine from this folder.
Delete the installation information.
3
The installation information file has been copied to the
following folder on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Receipts]
Delete the [AR-B01.pkg] file from this folder.
There is no remove tool for Mac OS X.
Note
77
WAEBbPAGoE IuN THtE MtAhCHIeNE Web page
When the machine is connected to a network, you can access the machine's settings from your computer using a Web browser. The
settings will appear in a Web page in your browser, and you can configure the machine's E-mail server settings in the Web page to
have the machine receive e-mail and automatically print out attached files, as well as automatically send e-mail to the administrator
of the machine and/or the dealer which provides information on machine use (print count, copy count, etc.) and error conditions
(paper misfeed, out of paper, out of toner, etc.).
7
To use these functions, the machine must be able to connect to the Internet and the recipient of the messages must have a Web
browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later, or an equivalent Web browser) and an SMTP-compatible e-mail software program.
Accessing the Web page
Use the following procedure to access the Web page.
Open the Web browser on your computer.
Supported browsers:
In the "Address" field of your Web browser,
enter the IP address of the machine as a URL.
Enter the IP address previously
1
2
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Windows)/
5.1 or later (Macintosh)
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later
configured in the machine.
To check the machine's IP
address, print "NIC PAGE" as
explained in "Printing the printer
When the connection is completed, the following Web
page will appear in your Web browser.
78
WAEBbPAGoE IuN THtE MtAhCHIeNE Web page (FOR USERS)
7
When you access the user Web pages in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the right frame that
allows you to configure settings for that item.
When you have finished configuring settings, be sure to click [Submit] to save them. For explanations of the settings, click [General]
under [Help] in the menu frame.
1
Submit Print Job setup
A file in a computer can be printed out.
1
2
3
4
5
6
79
WDEBiPrAGeE IcN THtElMyACHpINErinting a file in a computer
7
A file that can be accessed by your computer can be directly printed without using the printer driver by specifying the file's address.
Any file that can be accessed by your computer can be printed by this method, including not only files in your computer but files in
other computers connected to the same network.
To directly print a file by this method, click "Submit Print Job" in the menu frame of the Web page.
In the link menu, click [Submit Print Job].
The "Submit Print Job" screen
will appear.
Enter the address of the file in "Enter Filename".
You can also click [Browse] to look for the file.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
1
3
4
Click [Print].
Printing begins.
Select the print format in "Job Detail".
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
2
80
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
About the Web page (FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR)
7
In addition to the menus that appear for users, other menus that can only be used by the administrator appear in the administrator
Web pages.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the right frame that
allows you to configure settings for that item. Settings that can only be configured by the administrator are explained here.
1
Information setup
Configure machine identification information for the status &
alert E-mail function.
2
Password setup
Establish administrator's and user's passwords. The
administrator of this software can set passwords (for
administrator and user) to authorize access to the Web page for
the security of the settings on the page. If such a security
measure is not required, the Password Setting procedure can be
skipped. This will leave Web access settings open to all users.
1
☞
2
3
3
4
Status Message setup
Configure parameters required for sending status messages,
such as destination addresses and time schedules.
4
5
Alerts Message setup
6
Configure parameters required for sending alert messages,
such as destination addresses and types of event for which
messages are sent.
5
Services Setup
Configure information concerning the e-mail system.
81
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
E-mail print function
(part 1)
7
An e-mail account can be set up for the machine. When this is done, the machine will periodically check the e-mail server for e-mail
and automatically print out any file attachments it receives. This provides a means for printing a file from a computer that does not
have the printer driver installed, as the user can simply send the file to the machine as an e-mail attachment.
Setting up the E-mail print function
To use the e-mail print function, the machine must have an
e-mail account.
In the link menu, click [Direct Print].
1
The "Direct Print Setup" screen
will appear.
Configure the required e-mail settings.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
2
Click [Submit] to store the entered data.
3
82
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
E-mail print function
Using the E-mail print function
(part 2)
7
To use the e-mail print function, attach the file that you wish to print to an e-mail message and send the e-mail to the machine's
e-mail address.
The machine can print the following file types:
PCLXL, PCL5e, PS, PDF, and TIFF, with file extensions pcl, ps, pdf, tiff, and tif
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are
entered in the format "command name = value".
The following control commands are available:
Function
Copies
Command name
COPIES
Value
Entry example
COPIES=2
1-999
Staple
JOBSTAPLE
DUPLEX
STAPLENO, STAPLELEFT
OFF, TOP, LEFT
JOBSTAPLE=STAPLENO
DUPLEX=LEFT
Two-sided print
Account number ACCOUNTNUMBER 5-digit number
ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111
LANGUAGE=TIFF
PAPER=A4
File type
Paper
LANGUAGE
PAPER
AUTO, PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF
Name of available paper (LETTER, etc.)
●
●
●
Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
If an e-mail is sent with nothing entered in the message, printing will take place according to the "DEFAULT SETTINGS" in the
condition settings menu of printer mode in the machine.
Note
●
●
●
To print PS files and PDF files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
Encrypted PDF files cannot be printed.
Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file type.
83
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
(part 1)
7
These functions send information on machine use (print count, copy count, etc.) and error conditions (paper misfeed, out of paper,
out of toner, etc.) via e-mail to the administrator of the machine or the dealer.
Information setup
SMTP setup
Machine identification information for the status & alert E-mail
function is configured in the "Information Setup" screen. The
entered information will be included in status & alert E-mail
messages.
The Status & Alert E-mail function uses SMTP (Simple Mail
Transport Protocol) to send e-mail. The following procedure is
used to set up the e-mail environment. This must be done by
the system administrator or other person familiar with the
network.
In the link menu, click [Information].
1
The "Information Setup" screen
In the link menu, click [Services].
1
will appear.
The "Services Setup" screen will appear.
Click [SMTP].
2
Enter the machine information.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
2
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
3
Enter the information required to set up the
e-mail environment.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
3
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
4
84
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
Status message setup
Use the status message function to send the current counter information, such as copy count, print count, and total output count, on
a basis of the specified schedule. The destinations can be set for administrators and dealers respectively.
(part 2)
7
To set up the status message, follow these steps:
When the E-mail Status settings are completed, printer count
information will be sent periodically by e-mail to the specified
e-mail addresses.
In the link menu, click [Status Message].
The "Status Message Setup" screen will appear.
1
2
If you quit the browser before clicking [Submit], the
Note
Enter the required information, including the
destination addresses and time schedule.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
settings will be canceled. To send printer information
immediately to the specified e-mail addresses, click
[Send Now].
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
3
85
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
Alerts message setup
Use the alert message function to send alert information, such as empty toner and trouble including paper misfeeds, to specified
destinations when such problems occur. The destinations can be set for administrators and dealers respectively.
(part 3)
7
To set up the alert message, follow the procedure shown below.
In the link menu, click [Alerts Message].
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
1
2
3
The "Alerts Message Setup" screen will appear.
Enter the destination addresses.
For more information, click [Help] in the menu frame.
If these parameters are set, event information for the printer will
be transmitted to the specified addresses via E-mail each time
a specified event occurs. The meaning of each event item is
shown below.
Paper Jam: A paper misfeed occurs.
Toner Low: Toner is low.
No Toner: Toner must be added.
Paper Out: Paper must be loaded.
Service Required:The self-diagnostic function has found a
problem.
PM Required: Maintenance is required.
If you quit the browser before clicking [Submit], the
settings will be canceled.
Note
86
WEB PAGE IN THE MACHINE
Protecting information programmed in the web page ("Passwords")
7
When the Web server is accessed, the user Web page initially opens.
The user Web page shows only the menu that regular users use to perform tasks such as checking the machine's status, directly
printing a file on a computer, and storing and editing destinations.
The menu for settings that can only be configured by the administrator, such as password settings and settings for the server used
by the machine, appears in the administrator screen. The administrator Web page shows the entire menu, including the menu shown
on the user Web page.
In the factory default setting, both password functions are disabled. To set a User and/or Admin password, the administrator needs to
follow the steps below:
In the link menu, click [Passwords].
Click [Submit] to store the entered passwords.
1
2
3
The Password Setup screen will appear.
Enter the passwords and click the check box of
[Enable Password Protection of this Web Site].
For more information, click [Help]
in the menu frame.
●
If you enable the password protection without entering User or Administrator passwords, the passwords which were previously
entered will be automatically set. The factory default passwords are "Sharp" for both Admin and User.
If passwords have already been established, enter the Admin password in the [Admin Password] field. When setting the
passwords for the first time, enter "Sharp" in this field.
Note
●
Once the passwords have been established, you will be prompted for user name and password every time you open the Web page
of this system. The user names will always be "user" for user level and "admin" for administrator level.
87
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer specifications
8
AR-M256/AR-M257/AR-M258: 25 pages/min. at 600 dpi
Printing speed
AR-M316/AR-M317/AR-M318: 31 pages/min. at 600 dpi
1
Resolution*
Memory
600 dpi/300 dpi selectable
Standard memory: 64 MB
Additional memory slot: 1 slot (a 128 MB or 256 MB of additional memory module (144-pin SDRAM
SODIMM) can be installed)
1
Standard memory: 32 MB*
IMC Memory
Additional memory slots: 2 slots (maximum of 1024 MB of additional memory modules (168-pin
SDRAM DIMM) can be installed)
2
Emulation
PCL5e, PCL6, PS3 (PostScript 3)*
PCL6 compatible: 80 outline fonts and 1 bitmap font
PostScript 3 compatible* : 136 outline fonts
Installed fonts
2
IEEE 1284-compliant parallel interface
USB 2.0 (Full-Speed/Low-Speed) interface
10/100BASE-TX network interface
Interface
*1 The factory default setting for memory used for the printer function is 16 MB. The proportion of IMC memory allocated to the
printer function can be changed in the key operator programs. See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the "Key operator's guide".
*2 Available only if the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product
improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There
Note
may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
88
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
(part 1)
8
Windows
PPD
Macintosh
PPD
Function
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Frequently used
functions
Number of copies
1 to 999
Yes
1 to 999
Yes
1 to 999
Yes
1 to 999
Yes
1 to 999
Yes
Printing orientation
Two-sided printing
Binding Style
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Book/Tablet
Book/Tablet
Book/Tablet
Long Side /
Short Side
Long Side /
Short Side
*6
Pamphlet Style
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
*2
N-up
Number
2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 9, 16
2, 4, 6, 9, 16
Selectable
Selectable
Yes
Order
Selectable
On/Off
Yes
Selectable
On/Off
Yes
Selectable
On/Off
Yes
Selectable
*2
Border
Yes
Paper
Paper Size
Yes
*3
*1
Custom Paper Size
Source Selection
Cover Settings
1 size
Yes
1 size
Yes
1 size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.
*2 N-up printing cannot be used in Windows NT 4.0. In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, 2, 4, 6, 9, and 16 N-up can be used.
*3 A custom paper size cannot be set in Windows NT 4.0. In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, one custom paper size can be set.
*6 Pamphlet style printing is available in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.
89
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
(part 2)
8
Windows
PPD
Macintosh
PPD
Function
Resolution
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Graphics
600x600dpi/
300x300dpi
600x600dpi/
300x300dpi
600x600dpi
600x600dpi
600x600dpi
Halftone
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Graphics Mode
Zoom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
*7
Mirror Image
Negative Image
Fit to Page
Resident fonts
No
No
Yes
Yes
*7
No
No
Yes
Yes
*8
Yes
80 fonts
Yes
Yes
Yes
*4
Fonts
80 fonts
136 fonts
136 fonts
35 fonts
Selectable download
fonts
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
Type 1,
TrueType
bitmap,
Type 1,
TrueType
*5
No
*4 In Windows NT 4.0, 35 resident fonts are available.
*5 Type 1 and TrueType can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
*7 Cannot be used in Mac OS X.
*8 Can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.
90
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
(part 3)
8
Windows
PPD
Macintosh
PPD
Function
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
*7
Other functions
Auto configuration
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Settings
Overlay
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Watermark
Job Compression
Bitmap Compression
No
No
No
No
*7 Cannot be used in Mac OS X.
91
Introduction
This manual describes the printer function of the M256/M257/M316/M317/5625/5631digital multifunctional system.
●
For information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral devices, and other
Note
copier-related information, please refer to your operation manual for copier.
The machine's default settings and default settings for the printer function can be changed using the key operator programs. For
●
more information, see the key operator's guide.
Where "AR-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model for "XXXX". For the name of your model,
●
see "PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the operation manual for copier.
This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the "RSPF".
The screen images and procedures that appear in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of Windows ,
some screen images may be different from those in this manual.
For information on using your operating system, refer to your operating system's manual or online Help.
●
®
®
●
●
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product
improvements and modifications.
2
How to use the online manual
This section explains how to view the online manual. Please read this section before using the online manual.
For information on using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader Help.
How to Control the Online Manual
Following Links
In this manual, the following buttons are displayed at the bottom
of each page. Click these buttons to move quickly to pages that
you wish to view.
This manual uses a link function that allows you to jump to a
related page. If you click green, underlined text, the related
page will be displayed. (In the Contents section, the linked
areas are not underlined.)
To return to the previous page, click the button on the menu
bar of Acrobat Reader.
CONTENTS
Displays the Contents of this manual. Click on a topic in the
Contents to jump directly to that section.
Using Bookmarks
Bookmarks have been created on the left side of this manual.
You can click on a bookmark to jump directly to that section.
Takes you forward page by page.
Takes you back page by page.
How to Print Out This Manual
To print this manual, select "Print" from the "File" menu of
Acrobat Reader. Select the desired printer settings in the "Print"
dialog box, and then click the "OK" button.
3
PRINT
Basic printing
(part 1)
1
The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
Make sure that the ON LINE indicator on the
operation panel is lit.
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
1
3
4
menu.
If the ON LINE indicator is not
The "Print" dialog box will appear.
COPY
on, press the [PRINT] key to
Make sure that "SHARP AR-XXXX" is selected
as the printer. If you need to change any print
settings, click the "Preferences" button
("Properties" button in Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0)
to open the printer driver setup screen.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
ON LINE
DATA
switch to printer mode and then
touch the [ONLINE] key.
PRINT
SCAN
DATA
The status of the printer function is indicated by the ON
LINE and DATA indicators next to the [PRINT] key.
ON LINE indicator
DATA indicator
There is print data in
memory that has not
been printed yet.
The machine is online
and ready to print.
Lit
The machine is
printing.
Blinking
Off
—
Windows 2000 does not have the "Preferences" button
in this dialog box. Select settings as needed on each of
the tabs in the setup screen.
The machine is offline The machine is not
and not ready to print. printing.
Start WordPad and open the document that you
wish to print.
2
5
PRINT
Basic printing
(part 2)
1
When "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select"
Click the "Print" button ("OK" button in
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0).
5
If "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select" in the "Paper" tab of
the printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for a
print job is not loaded in the machine, the printing procedure will
vary depending on the "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" setting
in the key operator programs (see the key operator's guide).
Printing begins. The print job is delivered to one of the
following trays (depending on which output devices are
installed):
●
Job separator tray kit is installed: Job separator tray
●
Finisher is installed: Offset tray
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled
●
The output tray can be selected in the key operator
programs (see "OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key
operator's guide).
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear in the touch panel.
Press the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key, load paper in the bypass tray, and then
touch the [BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
Note
●
●
The output tray can also be selected in the print
settings at the time of printing. To change the tray
selection, select the desired tray in "Output" in the
"Paper" tab of the printer driver setup screen.
If the paper type setting in the printer driver is different
from the bypass tray's paper type setting in the
machine, printing may stop. To resume printing, press
the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key in the touch panel, and specify
the same paper type as in the printer driver.
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is enabled
Printing will take place using a size of paper that is close to the
size of the print image.
If the paper is loaded in a different orientation than the
print image, the image is automatically rotated to match
Note
the paper. This setting can be changed in the key
operator programs (see "ROTATED PRINT" in the key
operator's guide).
6
PRINT
Basic printing
When the "Paper Selection" setting is "Paper Source" or "Paper Type"
When "Paper Selection" in the "Paper" tab of the printer driver
setup screen is set to:
(part 3)
1
If you selected the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" in the printer
driver setup screen but there is no paper in the trays that
matches your selection, printing will take place as follows:
●
"Paper Source", select the tray that you wish to use for
printing from the pull-down menu.
"Paper Type", select the type of paper that you wish to use
for printing from the pull-down menu.
You selected a tray in "Paper Source", but the size
of the paper in the selected tray does not match
the printing size.
●
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the paper in the selected tray.
You selected a "Paper Type", and although the
selected type of paper is loaded in the machine, its
size does not match the printing size.
"Paper Source" and "Paper Type" cannot be
simultaneously selected.
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the selected paper type.
Note
However, if "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled,
printing will not take place.
The size and type of paper loaded in each tray and whether or
not the paper loaded in each tray can be used for printing are
specified in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings.
(See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for
copier.
If you wish to select the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" when
printing, be sure to select these settings in the "Configuration"
tab of the printer driver setup screen. (See "CONFIGURING
THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
You selected a "Paper Type", but the selected type
of paper is not loaded in the machine.
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear. Press the [PRINT] key on
the operation panel, touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key, load the
correct size and type of paper in the bypass tray, and then
touch the [BYPASS] key. Printing will begin automatically.
7
PRINT
Opening the printer driver from the "start" button
1
Printer driver settings can be configured by opening the printer driver from the Windows "start" button. Settings adjusted in this way
will be the initial settings when you print from an application. (If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time
of printing, the settings will revert to the initial settings when you quit the application.)
Windows 2000/XP
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button and select
"Settings".
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings" and
then click "Printers".
1
1
2
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then
click "Printers and Faxes".
In Windows 2000, click "Printers".
2
3
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
In Windows NT 4.0, select "Document Defaults" to open
the printer driver setup screen.
Note
In Windows 98/Me, click the "Setup" tab.
3
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
Click the "Printing Preferences" button in the
"General" tab.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
4
8
PRINT
Printer driver settings
1
To view Help for a setting, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the window and then click the setting.
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen. When a restriction is
in effect, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction.
1
6
Tab
Check button
The settings are grouped
on tabs. Click on a tab to
bring it to the front.
Drop-down list
Allows you to make a selection
from a list of choices.
Print setting image
This shows the effect of the
selected print settings.
Checkbox
Allows you to select one
item from a list of options.
"OK" button
Click this button to save
your settings and exit the
dialog box.
1
2
3
7
2
3
4
8
9
"Cancel" button
Click this button to exit the
dialog box without making
any changes to the settings.
4
5
Click on a checkbox to
activate or deactivate a
function.
"Apply" button
Click to save your settings
without closing the dialog box.
●
Windows NT 4.0 does not
5
Machine image
6
7
have the "Apply" button.
The "Apply" button does
This shows:
●
●
The paper tray (in blue)
not appear when you
open this window from an
application.
selected in "Paper selection"
on the "Paper" tab.
The output tray (in green)
8
9
●
10
10
selected in "Output" on
the "Paper" tab.
You can also click on a tray
to select it.
"Help" button
Click this button to display
the help file for the printer
driver.
The settings and the image of the machine will vary
depending on the model.
Note
9
PTRIwNT o-sided printing
1
This feature allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Sided
(Book)" or "2-Sided (Tablet)" from "Document Style" in the "Main" tab.
●
Paper sizes that can be used for two-sided printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, and
Note
Foolscap.
●
Paper types that can be used for two-sided printing are Plain, Letter Head*, Recycled and Color.
*The use of Letter Head paper for two-sided printing can be prohibited in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings. (See
"CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for copier.)
Two-sided printing is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide).
●
The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper.
Printing result
Print data
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that
they can be bound at the side. they can be bound at the top.
10
PRINT
Printing multiple pages on one page
1
This feature allows you to reduce and print two or four document pages on a single sheet of paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Up" or "4-Up" for "N-Up Printing" on the "Main" tab.
The "N-Up Printing" setting is not available when "Fit To Paper Size" is selected.
Note
N-Up
Border
Border
"2-Up"
"4-Up"
If you select the "Border" checkbox, borderlines will be printed around each page.
11
PRINT
Fitting the printed image to the paper
1
The printer driver can adjust the size of the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Follow the steps shown below to use this function. The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a Ledger size document
on letter size paper.
The "Fit To Paper Size" setting is not available when "N-Up Printing" is selected.
Note
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup
screen.
Select the actual size of paper to be used for
printing (Letter).
The size of the printed image will be automatically
adjusted to match the paper loaded in the machine.
1
2
4
Select the original size (Ledger) of the print
image in "Paper Size".
Paper Size: Ledger
Fit To Paper Size: Letter
Check the "Fit To Page" box.
3
Ledger size document
(Paper Size)
Letter size paper
(Fit To Paper Size)
12
PRINT
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
1
The print image can be rotated 180 degrees.
This feature is used to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps that can
only be loaded in one orientation.
Use this feature when automatic rotation (which takes place when the loaded paper is the same
size as the print image and the orientations are different) results in reversal of the top and bottom
of the image.
To use the feature, select the image orientation in "Image Orientation" on the "Paper" tab, and
then select the "Rotate 180 degrees" checkbox.
Printing result
Rotate 180 degrees
Rotate 180 degrees
A B C D
ABCD
The procedure for loading paper is explained in operation manual for copier.
Note
13
PRINT
Printing a watermark
1
You can print a watermark such as "CONFIDENTIAL" on your document. To print a watermark, open the printer driver, click the
"Watermarks" tab, and follow the steps below.
How to Print a Watermark
From the "Watermark" drop-down list, select the watermark that you wish to print (for example "CONFIDENTIAL"), and start printing.
Print sample
You can enter text to create your own custom watermark. For details on watermark settings, view printer driver Help.
14
PRINT
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
(part 1)
1
When a finisher is installed, printed pages can be stapled.
To use this feature, open the printer driver setup screen and select it in the "Finishing"
field of the "Main" tab.
●
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30. When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, up to 50 sheets can be stapled
(up to 25 sheets when the paper size is B4, Foolscap, or larger).
Paper sizes that can be used for staple printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, and Foolscap. (B5R
can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
Paper types that can be used for staple printing are Plain, Letter Head, Recycled and Color.
Staple printing is not possible when the ROPM function is disabled. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
If the finisher is disabled in the key operator programs, the staple and punch functions cannot be used and output cannot be
delivered to the offset tray.
Note
●
●
●
●
●
Stapling is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
When a finisher is installed
The following example shows how portrait oriented pages are stapled together.
Print data
Printing result
The pages are stapled in the upper left-hand corner.
15
PRINT
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed
(part 2)
1
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the binding edge and number of staples can be selected to produce the following printing results:
Staple
Left
Right
Top
1 Staple
2 Staples
Punch function
When a punch module is installed on a saddle stitch finisher,
the "Punch" checkbox can be selected to punch holes in the
printed output.
Left
Right
Top
Select the punch hole positions in "Binding Edge".
●
The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
Paper sizes that can be punched vary depending on the punch module installed.
Paper types that can be punched are Plain, Recycled, Color, Letter Head, and Heavy paper.
Note
●
●
16
PGRINiTving priority to a print job
1
When a print job is waiting because the machine is copying or printing a received fax, the following procedure can be used to
interrupt the current job and immediately print the print job. Use the print job status screen to give priority to the job. For more
information on using the job status screen, see operation manual for copier.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Touch the [PRIORITY] key.
1
4
A message appears asking you
TING
LINE
DATA
DETAIL
PRIORITY
FAX
to confirm the priority print job.
Touch the [OK] key to interrupt
the current job and begin
printing the print job selected in
TING
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
STOP/DE
JOB
To view information on a print job, select it and then
touch the [DETAIL] key.
Note
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
2
The print job status screen
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
PRINT
010 / 00
PRINT JOB
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
In the job keys of the jobs waiting to be printed,
touch the key of the job that you wish to print
immediately.
3
The touched key is highlighted.
17
PRINT
Canceling a print job
1
A print job in progress or waiting to be printed can be canceled. Use the print job status screen to cancel the job.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
The job in progress and the jobs waiting to be
1
3
4
printed appear. Touch the key of the job that you
wish to cancel.
The touched key is highlighted.
LINE
DATA
FAX
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.
A message appears asking you
to confirm the cancellation.
Touch the [YES] key to delete
the job.
TING
DETAIL
TING
PRIORITY
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
2
STOP/DELETE
JOB
The print job status screen
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
If you do not wish to cancel the
PRINT
010 / 00
job, touch the [NO] key.
PRINT JOB
To pause a print job during printing, press the [PRINT]
Note
key on the operation panel and then touch the
[OFFLINE] key. ([OFFLINE] is highlighted.)
• To cancel a print job, press the [CLEAR] key ( ).
• To resume printing, touch the [ONLINE] key to switch
the machine online.
18
PRINTER SHARING
Sharing the printer using windows networking
2
The machine can be used as a shared printer in a Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP network environment.
Note that the Windows network environment must already be established.
Shared printer
Client
Print server
Client
Client
"Print server" as explained here is a computer that is directly connected to the machine, and a "Client" is any other computer that is
connected to the same network.
(On the print server)
19
PRINTER SHARING
Shared printer settings
On the computer to which the machine is directly connected
Follow the steps below to use the computer directly connected to the machine as a print server.
If your operating system is Windows 98/Me, start from step 1. If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, 2000 or XP, open the
control panel and then start from step 6.
2
For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Operation Manual or the help file of your operating system.
Note
If a message appears asking you to restart the
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Control Panel".
Note
1
2
computer, click the "Yes" button and restart the
computer. Then, open the printer folder and continue the
setup procedures from Step 6.
Double-click the "Network" icon ( ).
Click "Printers and Other Hardware" in the
control panel, and click "Printers and Faxes".
In operating systems other than Windows XP,
double-click the printer icon.
6
If the "Network" icon does not appear in Windows Me,
click "view all Control Panel options".
Note
Click the "File and Print Sharing" button.
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Sharing" from the "File" menu.
3
4
7
8
Enable "I want to be able to allow others to print
to my printer(s)." by clicking the checkbox, and
then click the "OK" button.
Establish the settings for sharing, and click the
"OK" button.
For information on a setting, click the
top-right of the dialog box and then click the setting to
display Help.
button at the
Note
Click the "OK" button in the "Network" dialog
box.
5
20
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
(part 1)
2
Follow the procedure below to install the printer driver in the client.
Note
Click the "start" button, and click "Control
Panel".
Click the "Next" button.
1
4
5
In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start" button and
select "Settings".
Select "A network printer, or a printer attached
to another computer", and click the "Next"
button.
In Windows 98/Me/2000, select "Network printer" and
click the "Next" button.
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and click
"Printers and Faxes".
2
3
In Windows 98/Me/2000, click "Printers".
Click "Add a printer" in "Printer Tasks".
In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click the "Add Printer"
icon.
The "Add Printer Wizard" will appear.
21
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
(part 2)
2
Select "Browse for a printer", and click the
"Next" button.
In Windows 98/Me, click the "Browse" button.
In Windows 2000, select "Type the printer name, or click
Next to browse for a printer", and click the "Next" button.
Select the printer to be shared in the network,
and click the "Next" button.
In Windows 98/Me, select the printer to be shared in the
network, click the "OK" button and then click the "Next"
button.
6
7
The contents of this window will vary depending on your
network environment.
Select settings in the "Default Printer" screen,
and click the "Next" button.
8
9
Click the "Finish" button.
22
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
Settings in Windows NT 4.0
If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, establish settings as follows in the printer properties after installing the printer driver.
For the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the Software Setup Guide.
(part 3)
2
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Printers".
Select "Local Port" in the "Available Printer
Ports" list, and click the "New Port" button.
The "Port Name" dialog box will appear.
1
2
4
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
The printer properties will appear.
Click the "Ports" tab, and click the "Add Port"
button.
The "Printer Ports" dialog box will appear.
3
Enter "\\(name of server connected to
machine)\(name of shared printer)", and click
the "OK" button.
5
Name of server connected
to machine
Name of shared printer
Click the "Close" button in the "Printer Ports"
dialog box.
6
7
Click the "OK" button in the printer properties
window.
23
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
3
This chapter describes how to solve printer problems. Refer to the relevant section based on the problem.
To load paper, remove paper misfeeds, load staples in the finisher, remove jammed staples, or replace the toner cartridge, see
"TROUBLESHOOTING" in operation manual for copier.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
24
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 1)
3
Check the connections
■ Is the interface cable compatible with the machine
and computer?
■ If the interface cable becomes disconnected
If the interface cable becomes disconnected, even only once
during the machine's operation, then printing may be
disrupted.
If this occurs, check the interface cable and ensure that it is
securely connected, then restart the computer.
Interface cables compatible with this machine are USB and
parallel cables. Check which type of cable is supported by
your computer.
For the specifications of the interface cable, see
"CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER" in the
software setup guide.
■ Is the interface cable connected securely?
Check if the interface cable is securely plugged into the
connectors of the machine and computer.
To connect the cable, see "CONNECTING TO A
COMPUTER" in the software setup guide.
■ Are any other USB peripherals being connected
along with the machine?
If your computer is connected to the machine through a USB
hub, see if printing is possible when no other USB devices
are connected, or if printing is possible when the machine
and computer are directly connected.
25
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 2)
3
Check Your Computer
■ Is there enough computer memory or hard disk
space?
■ If your computer is connected to the machine
through the parallel port, is the parallel port (LPT)
mode set to other than EPP mode?
To use the machine, your computer must have sufficient
memory and hard disk space. If there is insufficient hard disk
space, delete unnecessary files to increase the free space of
the hard disk. If there is insufficient memory, close
unnecessary applications to increase memory available for
printing.
The machine may not operate correctly if the parallel port
mode is set to EPP mode. To set the parallel port mode to a
mode other than EPP mode, refer to your computer manual
or ask the manufacturer of the computer. ECP mode is
recommended to obtain the best performance from the
machine. Note that some computers may use different
names for the modes.
If you are using Windows XP, the "Found New Hardware
Note
Wizard" may appear after you change the port setting. In
this case, click the "Cancel" button to close the wizard,
and then reinstall the printer driver as explained in
"INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the software setup
guide.
26
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 3)
3
Check the machine
■ Power switch on?
■ Copy job being performed?
Turn the power switch on. (See "POWER ON AND OFF" in
the operation manual for copier)
Wait until copying is finished. You can also select the key of
the job that you wish to print in the job status screen and then
touch the [PRIORITY] key. Copying will be interrupted and
the selected job printed.
■ Is the machine online?
When the ON LINE indicator next to the [PRINT] key on the
operation panel is lit, the machine is online and ready to
print. If the ON LINE indicator is off, press the [PRINT] key
and then touch the [ONLINE] key. (When [ONLINE] is
highlighted, the machine is online.)
■ Is the "I/O TIMEOUT" setting too short?
Set a longer time for "I/O TIMEOUT" in the key operator
programs.
COPY
ONLINE
OFFLINE
ON LINE
DATA
PRINT
BYPASS TRAY
SCAN
DATA
■ Has an error occurred such as a paper misfeed,
staple jam in the finisher, out of paper, or out of
toner?
When one of the above errors occurs, a message will appear
in the touch panel to alert you.
Follow the instructions in the message to clear the error.
Printing will automatically resume when the error is cleared.
For information on handling errors, see "TROUBLESHOOTING"
in the operation manual for copier.
27
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 4)
3
Checking the printer driver
■ Has the printer driver been installed properly?
Check if the printer driver has been installed, following the
steps listed below.
■ Is your machine selected correctly in the current
application for the print job?
Select the printer driver of the machine in the "Print" dialog
box of the application.
1 Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click
"Printers and Other Hardware", and then click
●
If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon of the
machine.
"Printers and Faxes".
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start" button,
select "Settings" and then click "Printers".
●
If the printer drivers are selected from a pull-down menu,
select the printer driver of the machine from the menu.
2 Check if the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon is
shown.
■ Is the port configured correctly?
It is possible that there is a problem with the port
configuration, for example another printer driver may be
using the port. Open the printer driver properties and
correctly configure the port that you are using.
☞See "TROUBLESHOOTING" in the software setup guide.
If the printer icon of the machine does not appear, the printer
driver is not installed correctly. Follow the instructions in the
software setup guide to correctly install the printer driver.
If for some reason the printer driver does not operate
correctly, delete the printer driver and then reinstall it as
explained in the software setup guide.
28
TROUBLESHOOTING
Improper printing operation
(part 1)
3
Printing is slow
Stapling is not possible (when a finisher
or a saddle stitch finisher is installed)
■ Simultaneous use of two or more application
software programs?
■ Is stapling disabled in the key operator programs?
Enable stapling in the key operator programs (see
Start printing after quitting all unused application software
programs.
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
■ Is an appropriate print quality selected in the printer
driver?
■ Is the finisher disabled in the key operator programs
(when a saddle stitch finisher is installed)?
Enable the finisher in the key operator programs. (See
"USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS" in the
operation manual for the saddle stitch finisher, and
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide.)
When the "Print quality" setting in the "Advanced" tab of the
printer driver is "Normal" or "Photo", slow printing may result.
Be sure to select a print quality that is suitable for the
document or image being printed.
■ Did you attempt to print more pages than can be
stapled?
Two-sided printing is not possible
When a finisher is installed, up to 30 sheets can be stapled.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, up to 50 sheets can
be stapled (up to 25 sheets when the paper size is B4,
Foolscap, or larger).
■
Is two-sided printing disabled in the key operator
programs?
Enable two-sided printing as explained in "DISABLING OF
DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide.
■ Are pages of different width mixed together in the
print job?
Stapling is not possible when pages of different width are
mixed together in a print job.
29
TROUBLESHOOTING
Improper printing operation
(part 2)
3
■
Does the print job include page sizes that cannot be
stapled?
Punching is not possible (when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed)
Stapling is not possible if the print job includes page sizes
that cannot be stapled.
■ Is the finisher disabled in the key operator
programs?
■ Is the paper tray that is selected in the printer driver
set to a paper size or paper type that cannot be used
for stapling?
Enable the finisher in the key operator programs. (See
"USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS" in the
operation manual for the saddle stitch finisher, and
"DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide.)
On the machine, set the paper tray to be used for staple
printing to a paper size and paper type that can be used for
stapling.
■ Are pages of different width mixed together in the
print job?
Punching is not possible when pages of different width are
mixed together in a print job.
■ Does the print job include page sizes that cannot be
punched?
Punching is not possible if the print job includes page sizes
that cannot be punched.
■ Is the paper tray that is selected in the printer driver
set to a paper size or paper type that cannot be used
for punching?
On the machine, set the paper tray to be used for punch
printing to a paper size and paper type that can be used for
punching.
30
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 1)
3
Check the paper being used
■ Non-standard paper used?
Check that the paper conforms to the specification. Refer to
"LOADING PAPER" in the operation manual for copier.
■
Are you using paper with a high moisture content?
Use paper that is in good condition, with a low moisture
content and no curling.
■ Is the paper loaded with the wrong side up?
Some types of paper have a front and a back side. If the
paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side,
toner will not adhere well to the paper and poor print quality
will result.
■ Are you printing on paper that has an uneven
surface?
It may not be possible to print correctly on paper with seams
such as the back of an envelope.
31
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 2)
3
The printed image is coarse
Part of the printed image is missing
■ Has the printer driver been specified to suit both
paper and the print job?
■ Did you set sufficient margins in the paper settings
of your application?
You can select "Draft", "Normal" or "Photo" for the print
quality in the "Advanced" tab of the printer driver setup
screen. When "Photo" is selected, you can click the "Image
Adjustment" button and adjust the brightness and contrast in
the dialog box that appears. Adjust these settings
appropriately for your print data and try printing again.
Printing is not possible at the edges of the paper. The print
margins are 5/32" (4 mm) at the top and bottom of the paper
and 1/8" (3 mm) at the sides of the paper. When configuring
the paper settings in the software application, be sure to
establish margins that are at least as large as the print
margins.
■ Is the paper size loaded in the tray the same as that
specified in the printer driver?
The printed image is distorted
■ Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check if the "Paper Size" options suit the size of the paper
If a document is physically damaged when it is output or the
image is skewed on the paper, discard the damaged sheet,
reinsert the paper supply and print again. Insert the paper so
that there is no visible space between the paper and the
paper guides.
loaded in the tray.
If the "Fit To Page" setting is activated, make sure that the
paper size selected from the drop-down list of the "Fit To
Paper Size" option is the same as the size of the loaded
paper.
☞See the operation manual for copier for more details on
inserting paper.
■ Is the orientation of document setting correct?
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup screen, and
verify if the "Image Orientation" option is set to your
requirements.
32
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a Notice Page is printed
3
If you find that a notice page has been printed at the end of a print job, the print data received from the computer has not been
printed as specified. Fix the problem as explained below and then try printing again.
If a Notice Page is printed
If the following Notice Page is printed, check your settings for the Staple function.
When the Staple function is not selected:
****************************************************
Notice Page
Disable the ROPM function by removing the checkmark from
"ROPM" in the "Configuration" tab of the printer driver setup
screen. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the
software setup guide.) If you wish to use the ROPM function,
set the print quality to "Draft" or increase memory.
****************************************************
The IMC memory full error had occurred,
a normal output was not able to be executed.
Please refer to the operation manual for
the solution method.
When the Staple function is selected:
Select "Draft" for the "Print quality" setting, or increase the
value set for "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator
programs. If this does not solve the problem, add more IMC
memory.
The IMC memory is used to store print data when the ROPM function is used. This memory is also used to store original image data
in the copy mode. The percentage of IMC memory allocated to the printer function can be adjusted using a key operator program.
See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator's guide. The memory can be extended by adding commercially available
memory modules. For details, contact your SHARP dealer.
Note
Disabling notice page printing
Notice page printing can be disabled using a key operator program (see "PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING" in the key operator's
guide).
33
TROUBLESHOOTING
Uninstalling the printer driver
3
To delete a printer driver that has been installed using the installer, follow the procedure shown below.
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
1
Panel".
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
Click "Add or Remove Programs".
2
On Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, double-click the
"Add/Remove Programs" icon.
Delete the "SHARP
M256/M257/M316/M317/5625/5631 Printer
Driver" from the list of applications.
3
For more information, refer to your operating manual or
to the help files for your operating system.
Restart your computer.
4
When reinstalling the printer driver, install it correctly as
explained in software setup guide.
Note
34
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer specifications
4
AR-M256/AR-M257/AR-5625: 25 pages/min.
Printing speed
AR-M316/AR-M317/AR-5631: 31 pages/min.
Resolution
600 dpi
IMC Memory
32 MB*
Additional memory slots
Interface
2 slots (maximum of 1024 MB of additional memory modules (168-pin SDRAM DIMM) can be installed)
IEEE 1284-compliant bi-directional parallel interface/USB 2.0 (Full-Speed/Low-Speed) interface
* The factory default setting for memory used for the printer function is 16 MB. The proportion of IMC memory allocated to the printer
function can be changed in the key operator programs. See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator's guide.
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product
improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There
Note
may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
35
|
